Division 02 Sitework Final

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Division 02 Sitework
ODAC
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
BUILDING CONSTRUCTION
DIVISION 02 : SITEWORK
1
Al LABINA / AL MANAR
in partnership with Hamza/ ECH/ LCE JV
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Foreword
The internationally recognized framework known as Masterformat released by the Construction
Specifications Institute (CSI) has been adopted in order to organize the sorting and numbering in the new
edition of the specifications in a manner that insures the easy flow and exchange of information among
specialists and the community of the building industry at large. The new edition involves 12 main
divisions. These divisions are:
Division 01:
General Requirements
Division 02:
Site work
Division 03:
Concrete
Division 04:
Masonry
Division 05:
Metals
Division 06:
Wood and Plastics
Division 07:
Thermal and Moisture Protection
Division 08:
Doors and Windows
Division 09:
Finishes
Division 14:
Conveying Systems
Division 15:
Mechanical
Division 16:
Electrical
Each Division comprises a number of related Sections. For example: Division 08 includes eight sections.
They are:
08100
Doors and Frames
08200
Wooden and Plastic Doors
08300
Special Doors
08400
Entrances and Storefronts
08500
Metal Windows
08600
Wooden and Plastic Windows
08700
Hardware
08800
Glazing
Further, each Section incorporates seven Parts as follows:

Part 1:
General: This is mainly concerned with the references, quality control, submittals, programs,
and maintenance.
Part 2:
Products: This gives a breakdown of material used in addition to their properties and place of
installation.
Part 3:
Execution: The most significant items in this Part are the execution and installation of the
works, field quality control, as well as cleaning and protection methods.
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Part 4:
ODAC
Methods of Measurement: This indicates the measurement units and the measuring methods
that shall be used for the Bills of Quantities.
Part 5:
Basis of Payment: This indicates the work that shall be completed for each item of the Bills of
Quantities. It also indicates the ancillary works to be included in the unit price rate.
Part 6:
Annex: Tables and Figures: Those relevant to the individual Section.
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
DIVISION 02
SITEWORK
4
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
INDEX
Division 01: General Requirements
Division 02: Sitework
02200
Earthwork
02500
Paving and Surfacing
02660
Water Distribution
02700
Sewerage and Drainage
02810
Irrigation Systems
02900
Landscaping
Division 03: Concrete

Division 04: Masonry
Division 05: Metals
Division 06: Wood & Plastics
Division 07: Thermal & Moisture Protection
Division 08: Doors & Windows
Division 09: Finishes
Division 14: Conveying System
Division 15: Mechanical
Division 16: Electrical
5
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 02200 Earthwork
Division
02 - Site work
Section
02200 - Earthwork
Part 1: General
1 01 Summary
The work covered by this section consists of providing all tools, labour, equipment and materials, and
performing all operations in connection with excavation and backfilling for structures, pavements, and
utility service lines related to building construction.
1 01 01
Section Includes
01.0
Preparation of subgrade and subbase/base course for structures.
02.0
Preparation of subgrade and subbase/base course for pavements.
03.0
Preparing of subgrade and subbase/base course for utilities.
04.0
Excavation and backfilling for structures.
05.0
Excavation and backfilling for pavements.
06.0
Excavation and backfilling of pits and trenches for utility lines including
buried mechanical and electrical appurtenances.
1 01 04
Related Sections
02500 Paving and surfacing
02660 Water Distribution
02700 Sewerage and Drainage
02900 Landscaping
03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete
1 02 References
1 02 01
Applicable Standards
1 02 01 04
USA Standards
1 02 01 04 01
American Society for Testing and Material (ASTM)

ASTM C 88: 90
Standard Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by Use of
Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate.

ASTM C 131: 96
Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small
Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine.
ASTM C 136: 89
Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse
Aggregates
ASTM C 535: 84
Standard Test Method for Resistance to degradation of Large
Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine.
ASTM D 422: 84
Standard Test Method for Particle-Size Analysis of Soils

1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
ASTM D .653: 90
Fluids
Standard Terminology Relating to Soil, Rock, and Contained
ASTM D 854
Specific gravity of soils.
ASTM D 1556
Determination of the dry density of the soil on the site.
ASTM D 1140: 92
Standard Test Method for Amount of Material in soils finer than
the 0,075 mm Sieve
ASTM D 1194: 87
Standard Test Methods for Bearing Capacity of Soil for Static
Load and Spread Footings
ASTM D 1556: 90
Cone Method
Standard Test Method for Density of Soil in Place by the Sand-
ASTM D 1557: 91
Standard Test Method for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils
and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures using 4,54 kg Rammer and 457 mm Drop
ASTM D 1883: 94
Standard Test Method for California Bearing Ratio of
Laboratory-Compacted Soils
ASTM D 2167: 84
Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in
Place by the Rubber Balloon Method
ASTM D 2216: 92
Standard Method for Laboratory Determination of Water
(Moisture) Content of Soil, Rock, and Aggregate Mixtures
ASTM D 2419: 79
Fine Aggregate
Standard Test Method for Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and
ASTM D 2487: 85
Purposes
Standard Test Method for Classification of Soils for Engineering
ASTM D 2488: 84
Standard Practice for Description and Identification of Soils
ASTM D 2922: 91
Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in
Place by Nuclear Methods

ASTM D 3017: 88
Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in
Place by Nuclear Methods
ASTM D 4318: 95
Standard Test Method for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and
Plasticity Index of Soils

ASTM D 4253: 93
Standard Test Methods for Maximum Index Density of Soils
Using a Vibratory Table
ASTM D 4254: 91
Standard Test Methods for Minimum Index Density of Soils and
Calculation of Relative Density

BS 1377 Determination of sulphate content, ion exchange method.
1 02
Codes
BS 6031: 81
Code of practice for earthworks
BS 8000-1: 89
Code of practice for excavation and filling

2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
1 03 Definitions
1 03 01
Technical Terms
Backfilling - spaces from excavation being refilled will be referred to as backfilling.
Base course - a layer of specified or selected granular material of planned thickness
constructed on the or subbase for the purpose of serving one or more functions such
as distributing load, providing drainage etc.
Borrow material - material obtained from sources other than from site excavation.
This is a reference to the source of supply and not to the characteristics of the
material.
California Bearing Ratio (CBR) - the ratio of the force per unit area required to
penetrate a soil mass with a circular piston.
Cohesion - that property of material that tends to make its particles stick together.
Cohesionless soil - a soil that when unconfined has little or no strength when airdried and that has little or no cohesion when submerged. Sand is a cohesionless soil.
Cohesive soil - a soil that when unconfined has considerable strength when air-dried
and that has significant cohesion when submerged.
Compaction - the artificial densification of a soil by means of mechanical manipulation
(e.g. rolling, tamping, vibration, or other means). The percent compaction is defined as
the ratio, in percent, of the as-compacted field dry density to the laboratory maximum
dry density.
Excavation - (a) the act of taking out material (e.g. soil); (b) the materials taken out;
(c) the cavity remaining after materials have been taken out.
Embankment - a raised earth structure on which the roadway pavement structure
(granular subbase/base course, asphalt concrete). is placed. When finally placed and
graded it will be act as a subgrade.
Embankment material - see fill material.
Fill material - soil material being placed upon the surface of an existing ground
resulting in a higher construction will be referred to as fill. (In road construction often
designated as preparation of embankment)
Grading - (a) construction of the earthwork portion of a road. (b) Planning or
smoothing the surface of parts of ground by means of motor-driven adjustable steel
blade (grader).
Ground surfaces - see subgrade.
Ground water - that parts of the subsurface water that is in the saturated zone.
Natural water (Moisture) content - as determined by ASTM D 2216.
Optimum moisture content - the water content at which a soil can be compacted to a
maximum dry unit by a given compaction effort. Determined by the ASTM standard
specified to determine the maximum dry density for relative compaction.
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Organic clay - a clay with a high organic content.

Peat - a naturally occurring highly organic substance derived from plant materials
Plasticity - the property of a soil or rock which allows it to be deformed beyond the
point of recovery without cracking or appreciable volume change.
Plasticity index - the range of water content over which a soil behaves plastically.
Numerically, it is the difference between the liquid limit and the plastic limit.
Plastic limit - (a) the water content corresponding to an arbitrary limit between the
plastic and the semi-solid states of consistency of a soil. (b) The water content at
which a soil will just begin to crumble when rolled into a thread approximately 3,2 mm
in diameter.
Relative density- as defined by ASTM D 4253 and D 4254.
Roadbed - the graded portion of a road, upon which the granular subbase/base
course is being placed. The top of the subgrade or embankment.
Rock - natural solid mineral matter occurring in large masses or fragments.
Sand equivalent - a measure of the amount of silt or clay contamination in fine
aggregate as determined by test.
Soil classification - the arrangement of soils in classes according to their physical
properties. There are several systems of soil classifications.
Subbase course - the layer or layers of specified or selected granular material of
designated thickness placed on a subgrade to support a granular base course.
Subgrade - the undisturbed soil prepared to support a structure or a pavement
system. The subgrade, if not adequate, may be improved by (a) the incorporation of
stabilizers, (b) any course or courses of granular material placed on the subgrade or
by (c) an asphaltic subbase (roadbase) on the subgrade. If the subgrade is of
adequate quality or is improved by one of the methods described under (a) (b) (c), it
may serve as subbase course.
Topsoil - surface soil, usually containing organic matter.
1 03 02
Abbreviations
Q.C.
Quality Control
1 05 Submittals
In compliance with Conditions of Contract, the following shall be submitted thirty (30) days before
earthworks are scheduled to commence.
1 05 04
Quality Control Submittals

01.0 Documented experience of Contractors sites engineer(s) and operator(s).
02.0 Records and reports of Contractors Source Q.C.
03.0 Records and reports of Contractors Field Q.C.
04.0 Records and reports of Contractors Internal Q.C.
4
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
05.0 Records and reports of External (third-party) Q.C.

06.0 Chemical analysis of earthfill
1 05 06
Other Submittals
01.0 Records and reports of contractors major equipment.
1 06 Quality Assurance
Sampling, testing and checking procedures shall be recorded on a daily basis (i.e. indicating day, month,
year) including corrective actions taken by the Contractor if necessary. Reports and records shall be
available for assessment to the Engineer not later than three (3) days after testing and checking. Reports
and records shall be established in a manner to ensure traceability. Arrangements shall be made in
Contractors work schedule and time allowed for testing and checking as indicated.
1 06 01
Qualifications
Contractors site engineer responsible for earthwork shall have at least five (5) years of documented
experience in this field, shall be familiar with the referenced standards, and shall have successfully
completed work similar in material, design, and extent to that work indicated for the project.
Contractors operators shall be skilled and familiar with all work and equipment and shall have at least
three (3) years of documented experience.
1 06 04
Quality Control
1 06 04 01
Internal Quality Control
Contractors Internal Q.C. shall include but not be limited to the following:
Checking of suppliers test certificates to conform compliance with specifications and standards prior to
first delivery. Checking of suppliers delivery tickets to comply with supply order .Checking of correct
storage of fill and backfill and aggregates for subbase and base course at least every week. Checking of
maintenance of equipment to comply with manufacturers instructions at least every month.
Field Q.C. as specified in ref. 3 04.
Source Q.C. as specified in ref. 1 06 04 03.
1 06 04 02
External Quality Control
The Contractor shall employ and pay for a qualified independent geotechnical testing laboratory/Agency
which will supervise Quality Control procedures carried out by the Contractor and perform its own
sampling, testing and inspection services during earthwork operations in accordance with indicated
standards and specifications.
The laboratory/Agency shall be approved by the Engineer.
All checking procedures and tests performed by the laboratory/Agency shall be properly documented and
submitted to the Engineer within three (3) days after checking and testing.
1 06 04 03
Source Quality Control

01.0 Testing imported fill in accordance with ASTM D 2487 and ASTM D 1557
for every 500 m3
5
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
02.0 Testing subbase and base course material in accordance with ASTM C 136,
ASTM C 131, ASTM D 4318, ASTM D 1557, and ASTM C 88 for every 500 m3
1 07 Delivery, Storage, and Handling

1 07 01
Packing and Shipping
For transport only equipment suitable for the location and type of work shall be used and maintained in
proper working condition and in charge of skilled and competent operators.
1 07 02
Storage and Protection
Topsoil shall be removed by stripping and carefully stockpiled for re-use unless otherwise specified.
Granular subbase- and base course material shall be stored and handled in a manner that excludes
degradation and segregation and avoid contamination.
1 08 Project and Site Conditions

If a subsurface investigation has been provided to the Contractor, the Employer will not be responsible for
interpretations or conclusions drawn from this data by the Contractor.
The Contractor at his option may perform additional investigations or exploratory operations.
The Contractor shall locate existing underground utilities in areas of excavation.
If utilities or structures are indicated to remain in place, adequate means of support and protection during
earthwork operations shall be provided.
When uncharted or incorrectly charted piping or other utilities are encountered during excavation, the
utility operator shall be consulted immediately for directions.
Damaged utilities or structures shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the utility operator or paid the cost,
which may result from any of the Contractors operations during the period of contract.
Existing utility serving facilities occupied by the Employer shall not be interrupted during occupied hours,
except when permitted in writing by the Engineer and when acceptable temporary utilities have been
provided.
1 08 02
Environmental Requirements
Dust on and near work and on and near all off-site borrow areas shall be controlled by use of all means
necessary if such dust is caused by the contractors operations during performance of the work.
Necessary precautions shall be taken to prevent pollution of ground with fuel, oil, chemicals or other
harmful materials.
Before commencing any excavation, trees, plants, shrubs, hedges etc. to be retained, protected and/or
preserved shall be identified and marked.
Excavation by hand shall be performed within dripline of trees and plants to be retained.
Root systems shall be protected from dry-out or damage to the greatest extent possible. Exposed roots
shall be covered with burlap and maintained in moist condition.
6
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Part 2: Products
2 01 Materials
2 01 01
Material to be Excavated
Unclassified as indicated hereinafter.
2 01 01 01
Classified Excavation
2 01 01 01 01
Top Soil
01.0 The top layer of soil which contains besides organic matters mineral elements in
adequate quantity to act as a nutrient medium for vegetation when watered.
2 01 01 01 02
Easily Loosened Excavation

01.0 Easily loosened excavation will be non-cohesive sand; sand-gravel mixes, and
gravels containing less than 15% of clay and shall not contain more than 30% (by
weight) of stones of gradation exceeding 63 mm and shall not contain any single
stone exceeding 0,01 m3 in volume.
2 01 01 01 03
Moderately Loosened Excavation

01.0 Moderately loosened excavation will be mixture of sand, gravel, and clay
containing more than 15% (by weight) of clay as well as all cohesive soil with a
water content classifying the soil as soft plastic. Stones shall be not exceed
portions given under ref. 2 01 01 01 02.
2 01 01 01 04
Excavation Loosened with Difficulties

01.0 Excavation ref. 2 01 01 01 02 and ref. 2 01 01 01 03 containing more than 30%
by weight of stones exceeding a gradation of 63 mm up to a volume of 0,01 m3.
Also included are all cohesive soils with low moisture content.
2 01 01 01 05
Rock Excavation for Pits and Trenches

01.0 Rock excavation for pits and trenches will be defined as material that cannot be
excavated with a track-mounted power excavator.
2 01 01 01 06
Rock Excavation for Open Excavation

01.0 Rock excavation for open excavation will be defined as material that cannot be
dislodged and excavated with modern track-mounted, heavy-duty excavating
equipment without drilling, blasting, or ripping.
2 01 01 02
Unclassified Excavation
All excavation regardless of type, nature, composition, or conditions of the materials encountered.
2 01 01 03
Unclassified Excavation Except for Rock.
All excavation regardless of type, nature, composition or conditions of the material encountered, except
for rock acc. to 2 01 01 01 05 or 2 01 01 01 06.
7
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
2 01 02
Excavated Material to be Filled and Backfilled
2 01 02 01
General
Material to be filled and backfilled shall be free from roots, organic matter, trash, debris and other
deleterious material and shall be excavated and stockpiled as necessary for the appropriate type of fill
and backfill or disposed off site if unsatisfactory or directed by the Engineer.
2 01 02 02
Satisfactory Material (Selected Material)

01.0 Satisfactory soil materials are defined as those complying with ASTM D 2487 soil
classification groups GW, GP, GM, SM, SW, SP unless otherwise specified and
subject to approval by the Engineer.
2 01 02 03
Unsatisfactory Material
01.0 Unsatisfactory soil materials are defined as those complying with ASTM D 2487
soil classification groups GC, SC, ML, MH, CL, CH, OL, OH, PT unless otherwise
specified and subject to approval by the Engineer.
2 01 02 04
Earth Fill
01.0 Soil material free of clay, rock, or gravel larger than 75 mm in any dimension,
debris, waste, or any other deleterious material.
2 01 02 05
Earthfill under Landscaped Areas

01.0 The top 50 cm of earth fill below topsoil shall be obtained from a source approved
by the Engineer and shall be free of any stones larger than 50 mm in any
direction, concrete, bricks, debris, or any other deleterious matter and shall act as
a source of plant nutrients and moisture.
02.0 Earth fill shall have a pH-value 6,5 - 8,50 and the total soluble salts content in a
saturated soil extract shall not exceed 1,500 ppm. The Exchangeable Sodium
Percentage (E.S.P.) shall not be greater than 10%.
03.0 The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a chemical and physical analysis
prior to delivery and filling.
2 01 03
Imported Backfill and Fill
2 01 03 01
General
No imported materials shall be delivered to the site until the proposed source and material tests have
been accepted in writing by the Engineer.
Final acceptance will be based on tests made on samples of materials taken from the completed and
compacted layer.
If tests indicate that the material does not meet specification requirements, material placement shall be
terminated until corrective measures are taken. Material, which does not conform to the specification
requirements and is placed in the Work, shall be removed and replaced.
2 01 03 02
Satisfactory Material
See ref. 2 01 02 02
8
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
2 01 03 03
ODAC
Unsatisfactory Material
See ref. 2 01 02 03
2 01 03 04
Earthfill
See ref. 2 01 02 04
2 01 03 05
Earthfill under Landscaped Areas
See ref. 2 01 02 05
2 01 03 06
Granular Subbase Course Material
Material shall consist of hard, durable particles or fragments of stone or gravel, free from dirt, clay balls
organic matters, and any other deleterious material, screened or crushed to required size and grading.
Granular subbase course material shall be central plant mixed and shall produce a uniform mixture with
the correct moisture content and shall conform to the following physical requirements:
01.0 Sand Equivalent when tested in compliance with ASTM D 2419: min. 25
02.0 Loss of abrasion when tested in compliance with ASTM C 131: max. 50
03.0 Plasticity Index when tested in compliance with ASTM D 4318: max. 10
04.0 Material shall conform to the following gradation:
Sieve Designation
Percentage by Weight
75 mm
100
50 mm
90 -100
4,75 mm
35 - 70
0,0075 mm
0 - 15
The grading is based on aggregates of uniform specific gravity and the percentage passing the various
sieves are subject to correction by the Engineer when aggregates of varying specific gravity are used.
2 01 03 07
Granular Base Course Material
Material shall consist of hard, durable particles or fragments of stone or gravel, free from dirt, clay balls
organic matters, and any other deleterious material, screened or crushed to required size and grading.
Granular base course material shall be central plant mixed and shall produce a uniform mixture with the
correct moisture content and shall conform to the following physical requirements:
01.0 Sand Equivalent when tested in compliance with ASTM D 2419: min. 50
02.0 Loss of abrasion when tested in compliance with ASTM C 131: max.50
03.0 Plasticity Index when tested in compliance with ASTM D 4318: max. 6
04.0 Loss of Sodium Sulfate when tested in compliance with ASTM C 88: max. 10%
05.0 Loss of Magnesium Sulfate when tested in compliance with ASTM C 88: max.
12%
9
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
06.0 Material shall conform to the following gradation:

Sieve Designation
Percentage by Weight
37, 5 mm
100
25 mm
60 - 100
19 mm
55 - 85
4,75 mm
35 - 60
2,00 mm
25 - 50
0,425 mm
15 - 30
0,075 mm
8 - 15
The grading is based on aggregates of uniform specific gravity, and the percentage passing the various
sieves are subject to correction by the Engineer when aggregates of varying specific gravities are used.
2 01 03 08
Granular Drainage Fill under Slabs-on-Grade

01.0 Capillary water barrier under slabs-on-grade shall consist of clean crushed
nonporous rock, crushed or uncrushed gravel. The maximum particle size shall
be 37,5 mm and no more then 2% (by weight) shall pass the 4,75 mm size sieve.
10
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Part 3: Execution
3 01 General Examination
All natural ground surfaces upon which foundations and embankments are to be constructed shall be
checked for unsuitable material.
Areas where unsuitable material has been found and removed shall be approved by the Engineer prior to
placing concrete or any filling or backfilling.
3 02 General Preparation
Stakes, control survey points, and benchmarks shall be established and maintained during construction
by the Contractor.
Positions and levels of existing utility lines shall be located and marked according to information obtained
from utility operators.
3 03 Excavation, Filling, Backfilling and Compaction

3 03 01
General
3 03 01 01
Excavation
Contractors schedule of work shall ensure that no excavation is left in an exposed condition for a period
of more than thirty (30) days unless otherwise specified or directed by the Engineer
Excavation shall be performed to lines, levels, dimensions, and depths indicated on Drawings and/or as
directed by the Engineer
Excavation shall be extended to a sufficient distance from walls and footings to allow for placing and
removal of forms, installation of services, and for inspections, except where concrete is authorized to be
placed directly against excavated surfaces.
All suitable and acceptable excavated material shall be used as backfill, fill or subgrade preparation and
shall be stockpiled at locations approved by the Engineer. Stockpiles shall be placed, graded and shaped
for proper drainage.
Material which is unnecessarily wasted, disposed off, or otherwise misused shall be replaced at
Contractors expense.
Sides of excavations shall be sloped as necessary to protect workmen. Where sloping is not possible
because of space restrictions or stability of material excavated, sides shall be shored and braced.
Sides and slopes of excavation shall be maintained in safe condition until completion of backfilling
regardless of time period excavations will be open.
On rock surfaces, only excavation methods that will leave the bottom of an excavation in a solid and
unshattered condition shall be used.
Sloped surfaces shall be cut into rough steps or benches to provide a satisfactory bond.
Overdepth excavation of unsatisfactory material below lines and levels indicated shall be as directed by
Engineer.
11
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
3 03 01 02
ODAC
Preparation of Subgrade/Ground Surface Preparation
All debris, unsatisfactory soil material, and other deleterious material shall be removed from the ground
surface prior to placing any fill, backfill or concrete. When the existing ground surface has a density less
than specified hereinafter for particular areas, the ground surface shall be scarified, pulverized, moistureconditioned to optimum moisture content and compacted to required depth and percentage of maximum
density as indicated.
When the subgrade is part fill and part excavation or natural ground, the excavated or natural ground
portion shall be scarified to a depth of 300 mm and compacted as specified for the adjacent fill.
Where soil has been softened or eroded by flooding or during unfavorable weather, all damaged areas
shall be removed, backfilled, filled, and compacted.
Subgrade outside building lines shall be graded within limits of construction between points where
elevations are indicated or between such points and existing grades.
Finished grading shall be free from irregular surface changes and within the following tolerances:
01.0 unpaved and landscaped areas to receive topsoil shall be finished within not
more than 30 mm above or below required subgrade elevations.
02.0 under slabs on grade, finished grading shall be smooth and even, free of voids,
compacted as specified, with finished surface not more than 13 mm above or
below required subgrade elevation.
03.0 under pavements, finished grading shall be graded to line and cross-section, with
finished surface not more than 30 mm above or below required subgrade
elevation. Surface smoothness of finished surface shall be 13 mm in 3 m.
3 03 01 02 01
Levels To Be Recorded
The Contractor shall take and record such all levels and dimensions as necessary during the progress of
excavation.
3 03 01 02 02
Excess Excavation To Be Made Good
The Contractor shall at his own expense remove from Site all material arising from excess excavation and
make good the same with "Plain Concrete" as may be reasonably required by the Engineer having regard
to the circumstances.
3 03 01 02 03
Disposal Of Excavated Material
Excavated material shall be disposed off Site only by night.

Material to be disposed shall become the property of the Contractor and he shall be entirely responsible
for its removal from the Site and its ultimate disposal.
The Contractor's disposal of materials arising from Site clearance shall be undertaken as the work
progresses so that the Site is kept free from unnecessary obstructions, at all times. The Contractor shall
be responsible for obtaining all permits at no additional cost to the Employer.
3 03 01 03
Backfilling and Filling
Tentative acceptance of the source of delivery of imported fill and backfill will be based on an inspection
of the source by the Engineer and certified test results submitted by the contractor.
12
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Backfill and fill shall not be placed, spread and compacted during unfavorable weather conditions.
Operations shall not begin until moisture content is satisfactory and approved by the Engineer.
Backfill and fill shall be placed in layers not more than 200 mm in compacted thickness for material
compacted by heavy compaction equipment and not more than 100 mm for areas where mechanical
tampers are used unless otherwise specified.
Surfaces to receive fill shall be scarified to a depth of at least 150-mm before the filling operation begins.
Backfill and fill shall be placed to required elevation, for each area classification listed below, using
materials specified in Part 2: Products of this Section as follows:
01.0 under unpaved and landscaped areas earth fill ref. 2 01 02 04.
02.0 under landscaped areas,
* 02.1 for the top 50 cm earth fill ref. 2 01 02 04 if suitable.
* 02.2 for the top 50 cm ref. 2 01 03 05
03.0 under paved areas,
* 03.1 satisfactory material ref. 2 01 02 02.
* 03.2 granular subbase/base course material ref. 2 01 03 06/2 01 03 07.
04.0 under structural elements, concrete of same class as structure.
05.0 under slabs on grade,
* 05.1 satisfactory material ref. 2 01 02 02.
* 05.2 granular drainage fill ref. 2 01 03 08 of indicated thickness.
3 03 01 04
Compaction
Where layers of soil material have to be moisture conditioned before compaction, water shall be applied
in minimum quantities as necessary to prevent free water from appearing on surface during or
subsequent to compaction operations.
When fill and backfill, embankment, or subgrade has been tested and approved, the Contractor shall
proceed with construction. However, if placement of concrete or the next layer is delayed, compaction
testing shall be repeated. If test results indicate that the layer does not meet specified density, regardless
of previous test results, the Contractor shall scarify and recompact the material to meet the required
density.
Each layer of backfill and fill shall be compacted, providing minimum percentage of maximum density
specified for each area classification as listed below in accordance with ASTM D 1557 unless otherwise
specified:
01.0 Under slabs on grade and pavement, top 300 mm and each layer of backfill or fill
at 95% maximum density.
02.0 Under unpaved and landscaped areas, each layer of backfill or fill at 90%
maximum density except top 100 mm for landscaped areas.
13
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
3 03 01 05
ODAC
Equipment
Compaction equipment shall be of suitable type and adequate to obtain the densities specified and shall
be dedicated for the sole purpose of compaction. Material hauling or placing equipment shall not be
considered as compaction equipment.
Where rollers cannot operate, compaction shall be obtained by using mechanical tampers. However,
hand operated equipment shall be capable of achieving the specified densities.
Compaction equipment shall be operated in strict accordance with manufacturers instructions and
recommendations. If inadequate densities are obtained, larger and /or different types shall be provided by
the Contractor.
Hand tampers shall weigh not less than nine (9) kilograms and have a tamping face not larger than 225
cm2.
Equipment for applying water shall be of a type and quality adequate for the work and shall be equipped
with a distributor bar or other approved device to assure uniform application.
All equipment shall be maintained in such a condition that it will deliver manufacturers rated results.
3 03 01 06
Disposal
Excavation that exceeds the volume that is required as backfill, fill, or subgrade preparation shall be
disposed off site.
No material shall be disposed off in a manner, which impairs adjacent properties.
3 03 02
Excavation, Backfilling and Compaction for Structures
3 03 02 01
Excavation
The ground surface of excavation shall not be disturbed.

Excavation to final grade shall be made by hand just before concrete is placed. The ground surface shall
be trimmed to leave a solid base to receive other work.
Excavation shall be to elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of 30 mm.
Overdepth excavation below foundations as directed by the Engineer shall be backfilled with the same
class of concrete designated for the foundation and shall be placed monolithically with the foundation.
Unauthorized over excavation shall be backfilled as stated above without additional payment.
3 03 02 02
Backfilling
Backfill shall not be placed against new structures until they have developed sufficient strength to
withstand the filling operation.
Backfill shall be spread equally around all sides of the structure.
3 03 02 03
Compaction
See ref. 3 03 01 04
14
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
3 03 03
Excavation, Backfilling and Compaction for Utility Lines
3 03 03 01
Excavation
Trenches shall be excavated to uniform width to provide ample working space and a minimum of 20 cm
clearance on both sides of pipes and conduits.
Trenches and conduits shall be excavated to depth as indicated or required to establish indicated slopes,
invert elevations, and to support bottom of pipe or conduit on undisturbed soil.
Excavation shall be to elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of 30 mm.
Unless otherwise specified or directed by the Engineer, a strip of minimum 600 mm width shall be kept
free from any loads at the upper edge of the trench.
Where rock is encountered, trenches shall be excavated 15 cm below required elevation and backfilled
with a 15 cm layer of base course material ref. 2 01 03 07 prior to installation of pipe.
3 03 03 02
Backfilling
01.0 Backfilling of trenches shall only start when inspection, testing, approval, and
recording of locations of utility lines have been performed.
02.0 After pipes have been bedded, satisfactory material ref. 2 01 02 02 shall be
backfilled up to an elevation of 300 mm above top of the pipe and compacted by
mechanical tampers, providing minimum percentage of maximum density
specified for each area classification as listed under ref. 3 03 01 04.
03.0 Then, trenches shall be backfilled in layers to required elevation, for each area
classification as listed under ref. 3 03 01 03.
04.0 For correction of unauthorized or overdepth excavation base course material ref.
2 01 03 07 shall be used.
05.0 Where pipes and conduits pass under structural elements not deeper than one
(1) m, trenches shall be backfilled with concrete unless otherwise indicated.
06.0 For pipe bedding and concrete haunching see relevant Sections
3 03 03 03
Compaction
See ref. 3 03 01 04
3 03 04
Excavation, Backfilling and Compaction for Pavement
3 03 04 01
Excavation
See ref. 3 03 01 01
3 03 04 02
Fill and Backfilling
Each layer of embankment shall be uniform as to material, density and moisture content prior to
beginning compaction.
Top 300 mm of subgrade shall be constructed of satisfactory material ref. 2 01 02 02.
Stones or rock fragments larger than 75 mm in any direction will not be permitted in the top 150 mm of
subgrade.
15
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
When embankments are to be placed on natural slopes steeper than 3 to 1, horizontal benches shall be
constructed into the slope with sufficient depth to accommodate earthwork operations.
3 03 04 03
Granular Subbase/Base Course
No subbase or base course shall be placed on the subgrade until the subgrade has been approved by the
Engineer.
Before starting subbase or base course operations, the Engineer may direct the contractor to construct a
trial length to determine adequacy of contractors equipment, loose depth necessary to obtain the
compacted layer thickness, correct moisture content, and number of passes required to obtain the
specified density.
Subbase and base course shall be spread and placed to required thickness with self-propelled spreading
equipment which will give the required uniform layer and specified tolerances after compaction.
Immediately after spreading, the course shall be compacted to specified density. Both static and vibratory
rollers are allowed for compacting.
Any moisture loss during spreading finished grading and compaction shall be replaced with applications
of water to maintain the proper moisture content.
Edges and end slopes shall be trimmed to conform to lines, levels and dimensions shown on the
drawings or otherwise specified.
After final compaction, the surface shall be dampened and trimmed, either placing the trimmed material
into the next lane or wasting it on the shoulder. Then a final pass shall be made with the roller.
3 03 04 04
Compaction
01.0 Cohesive subgrades shall be compacted to minimum 95% density for the top 300
mm and minimum 90% for all fill areas below the top 300 mm when tested in
accordance with ASTM D 1557. The water content for compaction of cohesive
soils shall be selected to provide the highest remolded strength consistent with
expansion considerations.
02.0 Cohesionless subgrades shall be compacted to 100% density for the top 300 mm
and minimum 95% below this for all fill areas when tested in accordance with
ASTM D 1557.
3 03 05
Excavation, Filling, Backfilling and Compaction for Landscaped or

Unpaved Areas
3 03 05 01
Excavation
See ref. 3 03 01 01
3 03 05 02
Backfilling and Filling

01.0 Areas to receive topsoil in which the top layer of soil material has become
compacted by hauling or other operations and activities of the contractor, the soil
shall be scarified to a depth of at least 100 mm and finally graded to required
elevations.
16
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
3 03 05 03
ODAC
Compaction
See ref. 3 03 01 04.
3 03 06
Dewatering
All excavation shall be performed so that the area of the site and the area surrounding the site and
affecting operations at the site will be continuously drained. Water shall not be permitted to accumulate in
crawl-space areas and the excavation. The excavations shall be drained by pumping or other satisfactory
methods.
At all time during construction, pumps, well points, sumps, suction and discharge lines, and other
dewatering system components necessary to convey water away from excavation shall be provided and
maintained by the contractor.
3 04 Field Quality Control

The following checks and tests will be required unless otherwise specified:
3 04 01
For Backfill and Fill

01.0 Visual inspection of backfill prior to placing to determine unsatisfactory material.
02.0 Visual inspection of each delivery of imported material prior to placing to
determine unsatisfactory material.
03.0 Checking suppliers delivery ticket of each delivery for completeness and
compliance with supply order for imported material.
04.0 One test for classification of soil according to ASTM D 2487 for every 1000 m2
for every completed layer.
05.0 One test of field density according to ASTM D 1556 or ASTM D 2167 as
appropriate for every 500 m2 for every completed layer but not less than one test
per day for each type of material placed.
3 04 02
For Subbase and Base Course

01.0 Visual Inspection of each delivery prior to placing to determine unsatisfactory
material.
02.0 Checking suppliers delivery ticket of each delivery for completeness and
compliance with supply order and specification
03.0 One test of gradation of material for each 500 m2 completed subbase/base
course in accordance with ASTM C 136 or AASHTO T 27.
04.0 One test of field density according to ASTM D 1556 or ASTM D 2167 as
appropriate for each 500 m2 for every completed layer but not less than one test
per day.
05.0 One test to determine the plasticity index according to ASTM D 4318 for every
500 m2 completed layer.
06.0 Thickness of layer for every 500 m2 for each completed layer to conform with
drawings and specification.
17
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
3 04 03
ODAC
For Subgrade
01.0 Field density according to ASTM D 1556 or ASTM D 2167 as appropriate for
every 500 m2.
02.0 Bearing capacity of soil on which foundations will be placed, for each strata at
least one test in accordance with ASTM D 1194.
03.0 Visual inspection of each subgrade and comparison with related tested subgrade.
All required tests may be performed in conjunction with a laboratory/Agency
employed by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer.
3 07 Protection
The Contractor shall maintain all backfilling and filling at the specified levels and ensure that the surfaces
are in a satisfactory condition during Contract. Any settlement after backfilling shall be corrected with the
same class of material. If such settlements indicate -in the opinion of the Engineer- poor backfilling, the
Contractor shall re-excavate to the required depth and backfill and fill again to required standards and
specifications.
During excavation and filling, the Contractor shall protect all work from erosion.
Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by subsequent construction operations or adverse
weather; the surface shall be scarified, reshaped and compacted to required density prior to further
construction.
Subbase and base course shall be protected from traffic, overload vehicles, other Contractors operations
and other detriments.
18
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Part 4: Method of Measurement

4 01 General
The quantities to be paid will be measured determined from drawings.
Excavation and backfill are measured geometrically according to the dimensions on the drawings. Any
excess excavation and back filling are not considered as part of measurement.
Excavation will be net as the void which is to be occupied by the permanent construction with no
allowance for working space or other additions.
The volume of rock excavation will include the minimum undercutting of subgrade as specified.
The volume of unsuitable material excavated will be measured separately from other excavation work.
Disposal of material arising from excavation will be measured as equal as to the volume measured as
excavation or as part thereof.
4 02 Units of Measurement
Excavation will be measured in cubic meter (m3) stating the starting level and indicating the depth in
successive stages.
Trench excavation will be measured in cubic meter (m3).
Disposal of material will be measured by cubic meter (m3).
Filling will be measured by cubic meter (m3) as equal to the void to be filled.
Subbase and base course will be measured in cubic meter (m3) computed from each typical section as
shown on the drawings and multiplied by the measured length.
19
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Part 5: Basis of Payment

5 01 General
Payment will be in full compensation for excavation, hauling and placing materials, for compaction
including all labour, plant, equipment, tools, traffic control, certifying and testing, quality assurance, and all
other operations to perform the work, including but not limited to the following ancillary works. (Ref. 5 02)
Material, which is unnecessarily wasted, disposed off site, or otherwise misused, shall be placed at
No payment will be made for quantities resulting from oversized or unauthorized excavation or any other
unauthorized operation.
Drilling, blasting, or ripping performed to increase production and not necessary to permit excavation of
material encountered will not be classified and paid for as rock.
Material or work, which does not conform to specification requirements, shall be removed and replaced
on Contractors expense.
5 02 Ancillary Works to be Included in the Unit Rate

01.0
Excavation in all kinds of soil, unless otherwise noticed.
02.0
Holding and supporting sides of excavation.
03.0
Removing existing foundation.
04.0
Disposal of excess material in authorized tips.
05.0
Level and compact bottom of excavation.
06.0
Subgrade preparation will be considered as part of excavation and not to

be paid for as an extra.
07.0
Contracting an independent laboratory/Agency to perform the external

quality control.
08.0
Investigations and exploratory operations performed by the Contractor.
09.0
Stockpiling any excavation material for later re-use on site.
10.0
Dewatering the site and areas adjacent to the site.
11.0
Plain concrete arises due to excess excavation depth.
12.0
All tests made on compacted soil.
13.0
Manual and mechanical compaction and watering.
20
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Annex: Tables and Figures

6 01 Tables
6 01 01
Angles of slope
Table 1: Guidance on steepest angles of slope for different soils

Angle of slope from the
Horizontal as shown in
Figure 1 and 2
Dry site
Wet site
Degrees
degrees
Type of ground
Clay:soft 1.2m to 3m depth of cut

Clay:firm 1.2m to 3m depth of cut
Clay:stiff 1.2m to 3m
Peat:soft non-fibrous
30 to 45
10 to 20
35 to 45
20 to 25
40 to 45
25 to 35
Peat:firm non-fibrous
NOTE 1. Approximate equivalents of the angle given in this table, expressed as the
relationship between the rise of a slope and the horizontal measurements are:
n 11
20 deg=1 in 2.8
35 deg=1 in 1.4
5.8
25 deg=1 in 2.2
40 deg=1 in 1.2
3.7
30 deg=1 in 1.7
45 deg=1 in 1
of slope are guide figures and are subject to:
nditions (usually not more than 14 days).
n the site;
e affecting the stability of slopes. Ground water
flow towards the slope may be intercepted to prevent
it entering the trench by the use of cut off drains or
Lowered by rising well points.
and slumping of sand and silt slopes can
d by weighting with a layer of well-graded
vel to act as a filter.
21
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
6 02 Figures
Fig. 1: Battered Trench
22
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Fig. 2: Structure Excavation
23
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Fig. 3: Edges of Excavation
24
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Fig. 4: Barrier for vehicles
25
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Fig. 5: Trench Excavation
26
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 02500 Paving and Surfacing
Division 02 - Sitework
Section
02500 - Paving And Surfacing
Part 1: General
1 01 Summary
The work covered by this section consists of providing all plant, labour and materials and performing all
operations in connection with external paving and surfacing for parking lots, driveways, sidewalks and
other paved areas related to buildings. Preparation of subgrade, granular subbase- and base courses are
included in section 02200 Earthwork.
1 01 01
1 01 04
Section includes
01.0
Asphalt concrete paving
02.0
Concrete paving
03.0
Concrete tile paving
03.0
Interlocking concrete block paving
04.0
Synthetic (proprietary) surfacing
05.0
Pavement marking
Related Sections
02200 Earthwork
03100 Concrete Formwork
03200 Concrete Reinforcement
03300 Cast-in-Place-Concrete
1 02 References
1 02 01
1 02 01 01
Egyptian Standards
1 02 01 04
USA Standards
1 02 01 04 01
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

ASTM C 78 : 84
Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Concrete
(Using Simple Beam with Third-Point Loading)
ASTM C 88 : 83
Standard Test Method of Soundness of Aggregates by
use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate
ASTM C 131 : 89
Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of
Small-size Coarse Aggregate By Abrasion and Impact in the Los-Angeles
Machine
ASTM C 936 : 82
Standard Specification for Solid Concrete Inter-locking
paving units (Amendment 1988)
ASTM D 242 : 85
Paving Mixtures
Standard Specification for Mineral Filler for Bituminous
ASTM D 448 : 86
Standard Classification for Sizes of Aggregate for Road
and Bridge Construction.
ASTM D 692 : 88
Standard Specification for Coarse Aggregate for
Bituminous Paving Mixtures
ASTM D 994 : 71
Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint
Filler for Concrete (Bituminous) (Amendment 1982)
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
ASTM D 977 : 86
Standard Specification for Emulsified Asphalt
ASTM D 979 : 89
Mixtures
Standard Practice for Sampling Bituminous Paving
ASTM D 995 : 88
Standard Specification for Mixing Plants for Hot-Mixed,
Hot-Laid Bituminous Paving Mixtures
ASTM D 1073 : 88
Standard
Specification
for
Fine
Aggregate
for
ASTM D 1190 : 74
Standard Specification for Concrete Joint Sealer, HotPoured Elastic Type (Amendment 1980)
ASTM D 1559 : 89
Standard Test Method for Resistance to Plastic Flow of
Bituminous Mixtures Using Marshall Apparatus
ASTM D 1560 : 81a
Standard Test Method for Resistance to Deformation
and Cohesion of Bituminous Mixtures by Means of Hveem Apparatus
ASTM D 1561 : 81a
Standard Method for Preparation of Bituminous Mixture
Test Specimens by Means of California Kneading Compactor
ASTM D 1751 : 83
Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint
Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and
Resilient Bituminous Types)
ASTM D 1752 : 84
Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber
and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction
ASTM D 2041: 90
Standard Test Method for Theoretical Maximum Specific
Gravity and Density of Bituminous Paving Mixtures
ASTM D 2172 : 88
Standard Test Method for Quantitative Extraction of
Bitumen from Bituminous Paving Mixtures
ASTM D 2397 : 85
Standard Specification for Cationic Emulsified Asphalt
ASTM D 2419 : 74
Standard Test Method for Sand Equivalent Value of
Soils and Fine Aggregate (Amendment 1979)
ASTM D 2950 : 82
Standard Test Method for Density of Bituminous
Concrete in Place by Nuclear Method
ASTM D 3204 : 86
Standard Specification for Preformed Cellular Plastic
Joint Fillers for Relieving Pressure
ASTM D 3406 : 85
Standard Specification for Joint Sealant, Hot-Applied,
Elastomeric-Type, for Portland Cement Concrete Pavements
ASTM D 3515 : 89
Standard
Specification
for
Hot-Mixed,
Hot-Laid
ASTM D 3666 : 90
Standard Practice for Evaluation of Inspection and
Testing Agencies for Bituminous Paving Materials
ASTM D 4561 : 86
Standard Practice for Quality Control Systems for an
Inspection and Testing Agency for Bituminous Paving Materials
ASTM D 4791 : 89
Coarse Aggregate
Standard Test Method for Flat or Elongated Particles in
1 02 01 04 04 American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials

AASHTO M 17 : 94
Paving Mixtures
Standard Specification for Mineral Filler for Bituminous
AASHTO M 20 : 70
Standard Specification for Penetration Graded Asphalt
Cement (Amendment 1986)
AASHTO M 81 : 92
Curing Type)
Standard Specification for Cut-Back Asphalt (Rapid2

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
AASHTO M 82 : 75
Standard Specification for Cut-Back Asphalt (MediumCuring Type) (Amendment 1986)
AASHTO M 140 : 88
Standard Specification for Emulsified Asphalt
AASHTO M 208 : 87
Standard Specification for Cationic Emulsified Asphalt
AASHTO M 226 : 80
Standard Specification for Viscosity Graded
Cement (Amendment 1986)
AASHTO M 248 : 91
Yellow Traffic Paint
Asphalt
Standard Specification for Ready-mixed White and
AASHTO T 85 : 91
Standard Method of Test for Specific Gravity and
Absorption of Coarse Aggregate
AASHTO T 96 : 94
Small-size Aggregate
Standard Method of Test for Resistance to Gradation of
AASHTO T 104 : 94
Standard Method of Test for Soundness of Aggregate by
Use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate
AASHTO T 164 : 94
Standard Method of Test for Quantitative Extraction of
Bitumen from Bituminous Paving Mixtures
AASHTO T 166 : 93
Standard Method of test for Bulk Specific Gravity of
Compacted Bituminous Mixtures
AASHTO T 168 : 91
Mixtures
Standard Method for Sampling Bituminous Paving
AASHTO T 176 : 86
Standard Method of Test for Plastic Fines in Graded
Aggregates and Soils by Use of the Sand Equivalent Test
AASHTO T 209 : 94
Standard Method of Test for Maximum Specific Density
of Bituminous Paving Mixtures
AASHTO T 230 : 68
Standard Method of Test for Determining Degree of
Compaction of Bituminous Aggregate Mixtures
AASHTO T 245 : 94
Standard Method of Test for Resistance to Plastic Flow
of Bituminous Mixtures (See ASTM D 1559)
AASHTO T 247 : 93
Standard Method of Test for Preparation of Bituminous
Mixtures by Means of California Kneading Compactor
1 02 01 06
British Standards
BS 2499 : 93
Hot-applied Joint Sealing for Concrete Pavements
BS 6044 : 87
Pavement Marking Paints
BS 6717-1 : 94 Specification for Paving Blocks

BS 7263-1 : 94 Precast Concrete Flags,
Quadrants/Part 1. Specification
1 02 01 07
Kerbs,
Channels, Edgings
and
German Standards
DIN 485 : 87
Precast Concrete Paving Flags
DIN 18501 : 82 Concrete Paving Sets (Blocks)
1 02 02
Codes
BS 6717-3 : 89 Code of Practice for Laying
BS 7263-2 : 90 Precast Concrete Flags, Kerbs, Channels, Edgings and
Quadrants/Part 2. Code of practice for laying
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
1 02 03
ODAC
Other References
01.0
Civil Engineering Standard Method of Measurement issued by the
Institution of Civil Engineers and the Federation of Civil Engineering Contractors,
England
02.0
Concrete Paving Manual as issued by the American Concrete Pavement
Association, 2625 Clearbrook Dr., Arlington Heights,IL 60005
03.0
Asphalt Paving Manual as issued by the Asphalt Institute, Asphalt
Institute Building, College Park, Maryland 20740
1 03 Definitions
1 03 01
Technical Terms
Aggregate - a hard granular material of mineral composition such as sand,
gravel, slag, crushed stone, used for mixing in graduated fragments.
Asphalt - a dark brown to black cementation material in which the predominating
constituents are bitumens, which occur in nature or are obtained in petroleum
processing.
Asphalt cement - a fluxed or unfluxed asphalt specially prepared as to quality
and consistency for direct use in the manufacture of bituminous pavements
.
Asphalt concrete (bituminous concrete) - high quality, thoroughly controlled hot

mixture of asphalt cement and well-graded, high quality aggregate, compacted
to a uniform dense mass.
(Asphalt) base course - a layer or layers of specified material of designated
thickness in an asphalt pavement structure laid below the surface (wearing)
course. Some times called binding course.
(Granular) base course - a layer or layers of specified or selected material of
designated thickness laid on a granular subbase or subgrade below the
asphaltic pavement structure.
Bitumen - see asphalt
Bituminous concrete - see asphalt concrete
Bituminous emulsion - (1) a suspension of minute globules of bituminous
material in water or in an aqueous solution. (2) A suspension of minute globules
of water or of an aqueous solution in a liquid bituminous material
Binding (Binder) course - see (asphalt) base course
Coarse aggregate - aggregate retained on a 2.36 mm sieve
Construction joint (in concrete pavement) - a joint between concrete pavement
slabs which have been constructed at different times where one face is poured
against a previously finished construction.
Contraction joint (in concrete pavement) - a joint to allow a concrete pavement
slab to contract and move apart, and expand and move together. The joint is
placed in the upper third of a slab and is formed by inserting a joint former in the
plastic concrete or by sawing the hardened concrete.
Cutback asphalt (bitumen) - asphalt cement which has been liquefied by
blending with petroleum solvents (dilutes), as for the RC and MC cutback
asphalt. Upon exposure to atmospheric conditions the dilutes evaporate, leaving
the asphalt cement to perform its function.
Dowelled (expansion) joint (in concrete pavement) - a joint between pavement
slabs where lateral and vertical displacement to allow expansion and contraction.
Expansion joint (in concrete pavement) - a joint placed in full depth between
adjacent pavement slabs to allow the slabs to expand and contract
4
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Fine aggregate - aggregate passing a 2.36 mm sieve.

Haunching - lateral concrete backing of curbs and edgestones to restrain them
in position when loaded.
Joint filler - a strip of compressible heat-resistant material used to fill a joint
space.
Joint sealant - a material that seals a joint by adhering to appropriate surfaces
within the joint to prevent the ingress of water and deleterious substances.
Medium-curing (MC) asphalt - cutback asphalt composed of asphalt cement
and a kerosene-type dilute of medium volatility
Mineral dust - the portion of fine aggregate passing a 0.075 mm sieve
Mineral filler - a finely divided mineral material at least 70 % of which will pass a
0.075 mm sieve. Pulverized limestone is the most commonly manufactured filler,
although other materials such as stone dust, hydrated lime, Portland cement, and
certain natural deposits are also used.
Penetration - the consistency of a bituminous material expressed as the
distance in tenths of a millimeter (0,1 mm) that a standard needle penetrates
vertically a sample of the material under specified conditions of loading, time, and
temperature.
Prime coat - an application of a low-viscosity bituminous material to an
absorptive surface, designed to penetrate, bond, and stabilize this existing
surface and to promote adhesion between it and the asphaltic construction
course that follows.
Rapid-curing (RC) asphalt - cutback asphalt composed of asphalt cement and
a naphtha or gasoline-type dilute of high volatility.
Sealant primer- a substance applied to the faces of the joint just before the
sealant is applied in order to assist its adhesion.
(granular) Subbase course - the layer or layers of specified or selected material
of designated thickness placed on a subgrade to support a (granular) base
course.
(asphalt) Subbase course (roadbase) - a layer or layers of designated thickness
used in asphalt pavement system between the subgrade and the intermediate
base (or binding) course.
Subgrade - the undisturbed soil prepared to support a structure or a pavement
system. The subgrade, if not adequate, may be improved by (1) the incorporation
of stabilizers, (2) any course or courses of granular material (see granular
subbase or base course) placed on the subgrade or by (3) an asphaltic subbase
(roadbase) on the subgrade. If the subgrade is of adequate quality or is improved
by one of the methods described under (1) (2) (3), it may serve as subbase
course.
Surface (wearing) course - the upper layer in a bituminous pavement
Tack coat (bond coat) - an application of bituminous material to an existing
relatively non-absorptive surface to provide a thorough bond between old and
new surfacing (e.g. between base course and surface (wearing) course).
Viscosity - a measure of the resistance to flow. It is one method of measuring
the consistency of asphalt (bitumen).
Viscosity grading - a classification system of asphalt cements based on
viscosity ranges at 60C. A minimum viscosity at 135C is also usually specified.
The purpose is to prescribe limiting values of consistency at these two
temperatures. 60C approximates the maximum temperature of asphalt pavement
surface in service; 135C approximates to the mixing and laying temperatures for
hot asphalt pavements.
5
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Well-graded aggregate - aggregate graded from the maximum size down to

filler to obtain an asphalt mix with a controlled void content and high stability.
Workability - the ease with which a paving mixture may be placed and
compacted
1 03 02
Abbreviations
Quality Control
Q.C.
1 05 Submittals
In compliance with Conditions of Contract and provisions the following shall be submitted thirty (30) days
before paving and surfacing works are scheduled to commence:
1 05 01
Product Data
A complete material list and product data for each type of product proposed to be furnished and installed
under this section to demonstrate compliance with specified requirements, including manufacturer's color
charts showing full range of colors, textures, shapes, and pattern for each type and composition of paving
and surfacing as indicated for initial selection purposes.
1 05 03
Samples
Accompanying the above submittal, samples of each item shall be prepared on samples of adequate size
and construction, in sets showing the full range of variations expected.
1 05 04
Documented experience of contractors site engineer(s) and operator(s). Reports and records of Source
Q.C. Reports and records of Field Q.C. Reports and records of Contractor's Internal Q.C. Reports and
records of External Q.C.
1 05 06
Other Submittals
Mix design(s) of asphalt concrete including test results. Certificates of compliance.

Manufacturer's instructions for admixtures, joint filler, bond breaker, joint sealant and the like. Records
and reports of Contractors major equipment.
and records shall be established in a manner to ensure traceability between batch records, test results,
and locations of placed paving and surfacing. Arrangements shall be made in Contractors work schedule
and time allowed for testing and checking as indicated.
1 06 01
Qualifications
Contractor's site engineer responsible for asphalt concrete and road construction shall have at least five
(5) years of documented experience in this field and shall be familiar with the referenced standards and
shall have successfully completed work similar in material, design and extent to that work indicated for
the project. Contractor's paver-, roller-, motor grader- and asphalt distributor operators shall be familiar
with all materials and equipment and shall have at least three (3) years of documented experience.
1 06 03
Certifications
Certificates of compliance, issued by an independent agency/laboratory (approved by the Engineer), and

not more than 12 month old, indicating that any material proposed by the Contractor meets or exceeds
the referenced standards shall be submitted by the Contractor prior to execution of any work.
1 06 04
Quality Control
1 06 04 01
Contractors Internal Quality Control shall include but not limited to:
6
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Checking of suppliers test certificates and certificates of compliance for aggregate, asphalt cement,
asphalt concrete, asphalt for prime- and tack coats, granular subbase and base course material, curbs
and edgings, concrete tiles and all other material delivered to the site prior to first delivery and each
shipment that comes from another source than the previous one to confirm compliance with specification.
Checking of suppliers delivery tickets of each delivery for completeness and compliance with supply
order and specification. Checking of correct storage of material at least every week. Checking of
calibration of equipment prior to first use and periodically (at least every month). Checking of
maintenance of equipment to comply with manufacturer instructions (at least every month) . Field quality
control . Source quality control .
1 06 04 02
The Contractor shall employ and pay for a qualified independent testing laboratory which will supervise
quality control procedures carried out by the Contractor and perform its own sampling, checking and
testing services before and during paving operations in accordance with referenced standards and
specifications. The laboratory shall comply with requirements as stated in ASTM D 3666. The laboratory
shall be approved by the Engineer. The quality control system established by the laboratory shall comply
but may not be limited to requirements as stated in ASTM D 4561. Inspections, tests, and checking shall
be performed in indefinite intervals without giving previous notice. All checking procedures and tests
performed by the laboratory shall be properly documented and submitted to the Engineer within 3 days
after checking and testing.
1 06 04 03
Source Quality Control
Aggregate for asphalt concrete and cement concrete shall be sampled and tested at the source prior to
first delivery. Asphalt concrete and cement concrete delivered by ready-mix plants shall be inspected and
tested at the mixing plant prior to first delivery.
1 07 Delivery, Storage and Handling

1 07 01
For transport only equipment suitable for the location and type of work shall be used and maintained in
proper working condition and in charge of skilled and competent operators.
1 07 02
All aggregate, sand, filler shall be stored and handled in a manner that excludes degradation and
segregation and avoid contamination. Provisions must be made to prevent intermingling of different
aggregates. If bulkheads are used, they shall extent to the full height of the stockpile. To avoid
segregation, blended and combined aggregates shall be placed in layers not exceeding 1 m. Asphalt
shall be stored in tanks, at least one tank for each type and grade of asphalt. Asphalt tanks should be
calibrated so that the amount of remaining material can be determined at any time. All tanks, transfer
lines, pumps and weigh buckets have to be heated so that the asphalt remains fluid to pump. Provisions
have to be made to prevent asphalt from oxidizing during circulation at all times. For further requirements
see ASTM D 995. Consignments and packaging of flags, paving blocks, curbs and the like shall be edge
protected when delivered to the site. Discharging shall be done by crane or any other lifting gear.
1 08 Project- and Site Conditions

Existing underground utilities and structures in areas of paving operations shall be located by the
Contractor. If utilities or structures are indicated, adequate means of support and protection shall be
provided during paving operations. When uncharted or incorrectly charted piping or other utilities are
encountered, the utility owner shall be consulted immediately for directions. Damaged utilities or
structures shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the utility owner and the Engineer or paid for the costs,
which may result from any of the Contractors operations during the contract period. Existing utility serving
facilities occupied by the Employer shall not be interrupted during occupied hours, except when permitted
in writing by the Engineer and when acceptable temporary utilities have been provided by the contractor.
1 08 02 01
Dust Control
Dust caused by contractors operations on and near work shall be controlled by used of all means
necessary.
7
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
1 08 01 02
ODAC
Pollution Prevention
Necessary precautions shall be taken to prevent pollution of existing ground and sewage disposal
network with fuel, oil, chemicals or other harmful materials.
8
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Part 2: Products
2 01 Asphalt Pavement
2 01 01
Mineral Materials
2 01 01 01
Aggregate for Asphalt Concrete
Mineral aggregate for asphalt concrete shall consist of coarse aggregate, fine aggregate and filler
material if required. If the bulk specific gravities of coarse and fine aggregates differ by more than 0,20,
the job mix formula has to be adjusted. Aggregates shall be free from decomposed stone, organic
matters, shale, clay and any other deleterious substances, which may effect the asphalt concrete mixture.
Sources of aggregate shall be approved by the Engineer. Unless otherwise specified, methods of
sampling and testing shall be in accordance with relevant ASTM or AASHTO standards.
2 01 01 02
Coarse Aggregate
Coarse aggregate shall be the material retained on a 2.36 mm sieve and shall consist of clean, washed,
naturally occurring or mechanically crushed rock or gravel or blended combinations of both. Coarse
aggregate grading shall comply to the requirements of ASTM D 448 or any other grading, provided that
the combined coarse and fine aggregates, and filler (when used) produce a mixture that conforms to
grading requirements for combined aggregates in asphalt concrete mixtures (See Annex 6, Table 2).
Coarse aggregate, when subjected to five cycles of the soundness test (ASTM C 88), shall have a
weighted loss not greater than 12% when sodium sulfate is used or 18 % when magnesium sulfate is
used. Coarse aggregate, when subjected to testing in the Los Angeles machine (ASTM C 131 or
AASHTO T 96), shall have a loss not greater than 40% for aggregate used in asphalt surface (wearing)
course or 50% for asphalt base course. Coarse aggregate shall comply with ASTM D 692 unless
otherwise specified in the project documents.
2 01 01 03
Fine Aggregates
Fine aggregate shall be the material passing the 2.36 mm sieve and shall consist of natural sand, or sand
prepared from stone, crushed blast-furnace slag, gravel, or combinations thereof. Fine aggregate grading
shall comply with ASTM D 1073 or any other grading, provided that the combined coarse and fine
aggregate, and filler (when used) produce a mixture that conforms to grading requirements for combined
aggregate in asphalt concrete mixtures. (See Annex 6, Table 2). The sand equivalent when tested in
accordance with AASHTO T 176 shall be not less than 50. The plasticity index of the fraction passing the
0,425 mm sieve shall not exceed 4. Fine aggregate, when subjected to testing in the Los Angeles
machine (ASTM C 88) shall have a weighted loss of not more than 15% when sodium sulfate is used or
20% when magnesium sulfate is used.
2 01 01 04
Mineral Filler
At the time of use, mineral filler shall be thoroughly dry and free from lumps and other agglomerations
and shall have a plasticity index not greater than 4.
Mineral Filler may consist of rock dust, slag dust, hydrated lime, hydraulic cement, fly ash or other
suitable material and shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 17 or ASTM D 242 including
gradation as indicated in Annex 6, Table 1)
2 01 01 05
Combined Aggregate
2 01 01 05 01
Sand (for prime coat dressing)
Sand dressing shall be any clean granular mineral material that passes by 100% the 4.75 mm sieve and
up to 2% passes the 0,075 mm sieve.
2 01 02
Bituminous Material
2 01 02 01
Asphalt Cement
2 01 02 01 01
Penetration graded Asphalt Cement
Penetration graded asphalt cement shall be prepared by the refining of crude petroleum by suitable
methods and shall be homogenous, free from water, and shall not foam when heated to 175C.
Penetration graded asphalt cement shall comply with AASHTO M 20.
9
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
2 01 02 01 02
ODAC
Viscosity graded Asphalt Cement
Viscosity graded asphalt shall be prepared from crude petroleum by suitable methods and shall be
homogeneous, free from water, and shall not foam when heated to 175C. Viscosity graded asphalt
cement shall comply with AASHTO M 226.
2 01 02 02
Cut-back Asphalt
Cut-back asphalt shall show no separation or curdling prior to use and shall not foam when heated to the
application temperature.
2 01 02 02 01
Rapid-Curing (RC) Type
(RC) Cut-back asphalt shall comply with AASHTO M 81.
2 01 02 02 02
Medium-Curing (MC) Type
(MC) Cut-back asphalt shall comply with AASHTO M 82.
2 01 02 03
Emulsified Asphalt
Emulsified Asphalt shall be homogeneous and shall comply with AASHTO M 140/ASTM D 977. Cationic
Emulsified Asphalt shall comply with AASHTO M 208/ASTM D 2397.
2 02 Concrete Pavement
2 02 01
Concrete
The cement used for concrete paving shall comply with SSA 143 Ordinary Portland Cement/RapidHardening Portland Cement, SSA 570 Sulfate-Resisting Portland Cement. The minimum 28-day flexural
strength shall be 4,133 MPa/4133 kPa (600 psi) when tested in accordance with ASTM C 78. For further
requirements see Section 03300 CAST-INSITU CONCRETE
2 02 02
Reinforcement
(See Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement)
2 02 03
Formwork
(See Section 03100 Concrete Formwork)
2 02 04
Joint Reinforcement
The dowel bars shall be high yield steel bars 600 mm long and 18 mm diameter. One half of the length
shall be coated with liquid asphalt.
2 02 05
Joint Filler (for Concrete Pavement)
Expansion joint filler shall be certified as suitable for the intended use. Expansion joint filler shall be heatresistant and shall comply with one of the following standards: ASTM D 994, ASTM D 1751, ASTM D
1752, ASTM D 3204 Type I, closed-cell polyethylene or ASTM D 3204 Type II open-cell polyurethane.
2 02 06
Bond breaker
Bond breaker tapes shall be self-adhesive polyethylene or polytetrafluorethylene (PTFE) tapes.
2 02 07
Hot-applied Joint Sealant for Concrete Pavement
Joint sealant shall comply with

01.0 BS 2499 type N1 (high extension)]
02.0 BS 2499 type N2 (low extension)]
03.0 BS 2499 type F1 (high extension, fuel-resistant)]
04.0 BS 2499 type F2 (low extension, fuel-resistant)]
05.0 ASTM D 1190 (hot-poured elastic type)
06.0 ASTM D 3406 (hot-applied elastomeric type, for portland cement paving)
10
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
2 03 Miscellaneous Pavement
2 03 01
Concrete Tiling
2 03 01 01
Concrete Flags (Tiles)
Concrete flags (tiles) shall be made from concrete by the wet pressed or semi-dry process and shall be
sound and free of any defects that impair the strength or performance of the pavement. For flags (tiles)
manufactured with two-part mixes, the surface layer shall be formed as an integral part of the flag and
shall be not less than 12 mm thick. The surface shall be smooth and plane, free from projections,
depressions and crazing. All edges shall be chamfered unless otherwise specified. Arises that will be
visible after laying shall be without nibs and fins. The maximum dimensional deviation shall be 3 mm in
thickness, 2 mm in length and width, 3 mm for squareness of plan for flags not exceeding 450 mm
length/width and 6 mm for flags exceeding 450 mm length/width. The surface colour shall be natural
unless otherwise specified.
2 03 01 02
Bedding Sand
Bedding sand shall be clean sand graded from 0,075 - 9,5 mm. Not more than 10% shall pass the 0,075
mm sieve.
2 03 01 03
Bedding Mortar
Bedding mortar shall be sand:cement mortar 1:3 using 100% passing the 4,75 mm sieve, however, not
more than 10% shall pass the 0,075 mm sieve.
2 03 02
Interlocking Concrete Block Paving
2 03 02 01
Interlocking Concrete Blocks (Pavers)
Interlocking concrete blocks shall be made from concrete (normal weight aggregate) and shall be sound
and free of defects that interfere with a proper placing or impair the strength or performance of the
pavement. Any admixture to concrete shall be shown by test and experience not to be detrimental to
concrete. In composite blocks the surface (wearing) layer shall be formed as an integral part of the block
and shall be not less than 5 mm thick. When the wearing course is chamfered the chamfer shall not
exceed 7 mm in width or depth. All arises shall be uniform in shape. The max. dimensional deviation from
work sizes shall not exceed 2 mm in length and width and 3 mm in thickness. The surface color shall be
subject to approval by the Engineer.
2 03 02 02
Sand for Bedding Course
Sand for bedding course shall be clean sand graded from 0,075 - 9,5 mm maximum. Not more than 10%
shall pass the 0,075 mm sieve.
2 04 Miscellaneous Materials
2 04 01
Concrete Kerbs, Channels (gutters), and Edgings
Concrete kerbs, channels and edgings shall be of plain precast concrete, made by any process (semi-dry,
wet-pressed or wet-cast), max. aggregate size 20 mm, concrete class minimum C 15 . For units
manufactured with two-part mixes, the surface layer shall be formed as an integral part of the unit and
shall be not less than 25 mm.
Kerbs, channels and edgings shall comply with BS 7263 having minimum traverse (flexural) strength (see
Annex 6, ref. Table 4), shapes and dimensions as indicated in the Standard and the project drawings.
Kerbs, channels and edgings shall have a fair faced finish on faces which will be visible after laying and
all arises shall be straight and without any nibs and fins. The maximum dimensional deviation shall be +-3
mm in length, width or height, 2 mm squareness clearance, and 2 mm in straightness and winding for
units over 550 mm and 1 mm for units up to 400 mm. The color shall be natural unless otherwise
indicated.
2 04 02
Pavement Marking Paint
The paint shall be used as reflectorizing marking on bituminous and concrete surfaces and shall be
certified for the intended use.
The paint formula shall be based on plasticized chlorinated rubber, modified epoxy ester, or modified
drying oil alkyd.
11
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
01.0
Paint shall comply with AASHTO M 248.
02.0
Paint shall comply with BS 6044 type A.
03.0
The color shall be white or yellow
2 05 Mixes
2 05 01
Asphalt Concrete Mixes
At least thirty (30) days before the contractor intends to start production of asphalt concrete, he shall
submit to the Engineer all necessary documents including mix design, gradation of aggregate and filler,
results of trial mixes such as specific gravity and density determination (AASHTO T 209 or ASTM D 2041)
and determination of aggregate gradation and asphalt content (AASHTO T 164 or ASTM D 2172). Any
time a change in gradation or proportions of mix is intended to make, all necessary documents shall be
submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to first delivery.
The hot-mix asphalt concrete mixture shall consist of asphalt cement, aggregate and filler blended
together in precise proportions.
The job mix-design selected by the contractor shall be suitable and adequate for the traffic, climatic
conditions, and specific gravity of the aggregates used and shall be based on the Marshall or Hveem
method or shall comply with ASTM D 3515.
The appropriate job-mix formula shall be developed from trial mixes to determine one that meets all
criteria of the specification and the design method used.
Any variation from the job-mix formula in the grading of the aggregate as shown by sieve analysis or any
variation in bitumen content as indicated by extraction tests of the finished mixture greater than values
shown in Annex 6, ref. 2 06 01/Table 3 shall be investigated and corrected.
Grading of combined aggregate and bitumen content shall conform to the requirements of Annex 6 /
Table 3.
The nominal maximum aggregate size of the mixture shall be:
-37,5 mm for sub-base course
-19 mm for base course-12,5 mm for surface (wearing) course
Materials shall be mixed in a continuous or batch-type mixing plant.
The mixing plant shall be equipped and maintained in
approved by the Engineer.
compliance with ASTM D 995 and shall be
At no time during the processing, from storage to mixing, the temperature of asphalt cement shall exceed
176 C.
The aggregate shall be dried and delivered to the mixer at a temperature such that the mixture will be
produced at a temperature within the range suited to the asphalt cement as given in Annex 6 / Table 3.
The temperature between the given limits shall be regulated according to the grade of asphalt cement,
ambient temperature and workability of the mixture.
Each size of aggregate shall be separately fed by feeders in proper proportion and at a rate to allow
correct and uniform temperature control of the heating and drying operation.
12
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Part 3: Execution
Before any operation starts, Contractor's site engineer shall check that all areas to be paved have been
prepared to specified grades, levels and alignments.
Contractor's site engineer shall make sure that all necessary tests, inspections and preparations have
been made before paving operations start. Checking good working condition and proper
adjustment/calibration of all equipment. Positions and levels of existing utility lines and any other
underground structure shall be located and marked by the Contractor according to information obtained
from utility owners.
3 03 Installation
3 03 01
Asphalt Concrete Paving
3 03 01 01
Preparation
Preparation of subgrade . Holes and depressions in granular surfaces shall be repaired by removing all
loose and defective material and replacing with granular patching material approved by the Engineer.
Bumps, wave-like formations and corrugations, which impair the riding quality of the surface, shall be
removed and leveled to tolerances as specified. Immediately prior to application of a prime coat, all loose
and deleterious material shall be removed by sweeping and, if the surface is dusty, the granular surface
shall be dampened with water.
3 03 01 02
Prime and Tack Coating
Prime coats and tack coats shall be applied by a pressure distributor. In places the distributor cannot
reach, prime- and tack coats shall be applied with a hand spray attached to the distributor by a hose. The
distributor shall be equipped with a bitumeter having a dial registering travel per minute. The dial shall be
visible to the driver/operator that he can maintain the constant speed required for application at the
specified rate. The pump shall be equipped with a tachometer having a dial registering liters per minute
passing through the nozzles. The dial shall be readily visible to the operator. Means of accurately
indicating the temperature of asphaltic material shall be provided. The thermometer well shall not be in
contact with the heating tube. The normal width of application of the spray bar shall be not less than 3 m,
however with provision for the application of width less than 3 m if necessary. The distributor shall be
provided with heating attachments. The asphaltic material shall be circulated during the entire process.
3 03 01 02 01
Prime Coating
As prime coat a medium-curing cutback asphalt

01.0
grade MC-30 shall be applied at a rate between 0,9 to 2,3 liters/m2 as
determined by trial tests and approved by the Engineer.
02.0
grade MC-70 shall be applied at a rate between 0,9 to 2,3 litres/m2 as
03.0
grade MC-250 shall be applied at a rate between 0,9 to 2,3 litres/m2 as
If after a normal curing time (about 24 hours) some of the asphalt still has not been absorbed into the
base, the excess cutback shall be blotted with clean sand. Blotting includes spreading sand over the
prime coated surface and rolling it with a pneumatic-tired roller. Before hot-mix asphalt concrete can be
placed, however, excess sand shall be swept away. Recommended Spraying Temperatures:
Grade MC-30 & Grade MC-70 : Minimum 30 deg.C
Grade MC-250 : Minimum 75 deg.C
The maximum temperature shall be below that at which fogging occurs.
3 03 01 02 02
Tack Coating
As tack coat a diluted bitumen emulsion

13
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
01.0
grade SS-1 shall be applied at a rate between 0,25 to 0,7 litres/m2 as
02.0
grade SS-1h shall be applied at a rate between 0,25 to 0,7 litres/m2 as
03.0
grade CSS-1 shall be applied at a rate between 0,25 to 0,7 litres/m2 as
04.0
grade CSS-1h shall be applied at a rate between 0,25 to 0,7 litres/m2 as
The bitumen emulsion shall be diluted with equal parts of water.
Work shall be planned so that no more tack coat is applied than it is necessary for the day's operation.
Recommend Spraying Temperatures:
Grade SS-1, Grade SS-1h, Grade CSS-1& Grade CSS-1h : 20-70 deg.C
3 03 01 03
Asphalt Concrete Spreading, Placing and Compaction
3 03 01 03 01
Spreading and Placing
Hot-mix asphalt concrete shall be spread and finished true-to-line and graded by means of an
automatically controlled paving unit except that the use of a paving unit may be waived and a manually
controlled paver or hand methods may be used on irregular sections not accessible by a paving unit.
However, any equipment used by the contractor shall be approved by the Engineer. Asphalt concrete
shall be placed in consecutive, adjacent strips with a minimum width of 3 m except where edge lanes
require strips with less width. Placing shall begin along the center line of crowned sections or on the high
side of areas with a one-way slope. Asphalt concrete subbase, base course and surface (wearing) course
shall be placed in layers not exceeding 100 mm unless otherwise specified. When hand laying is
necessary, asphalt concrete shall be placed on a clean hard surface and shall be protected from loss of
heat and any possible contamination. The asphalt concrete shall be spread by hand in a loose uniform
layer of even texture, taking precautions to minimize segregation. Immediately after material in any layer
is placed, and before being rolled, the surface shall be inspected and all defects and irregularities in
alignment grade or texture corrected.
The vertical faces of gullies, curbs, channels and the like, against which the asphalt concrete is placed,
shall be cleaned and primed prior to placing asphalt concrete.
Gullies and similar projections shall be raised to their final level only after laying base course but before
laying the surface wearing course. The asphalt concrete shall be tamped around and against such
projections by means of hot tampers. The finished surface shall be left flush with the top of but not more
than 3 mm above such projections. The finished surface of any course and layer shall be laid as follows:
-Cross Falls: In case of roads with a straight cross fall, the fall shall be not more
than 3% nor less than 2%.
-Camber: With roads to be cambered the average fall of the finished surface from
the crown to the channel shall be not more than 3% nor less than 2%.
-Longitudinal fall: Longitudinal drainage falls in the channel (gutter) shall have a
gradient of not less than 0,8%.
Priming and placing asphalt concrete shall not be carried out when the weather conditions are, in the
opinion of the Engineer, likely to affect quality of work. Such conditions may include rain, temperatures
below 5 deg C. or sand storms.
3 03 01 03 02
Rolling and Compacting
For compaction of asphalt concrete paving two-axle tandem steel-tired rollers, pneumatic-tired rollers, or
vibratory rollers may be used unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
The asphalt concrete mixture shall be compacted as soon as the hot-mix can be compacted without
displacement at a temperature taking in consideration grade of asphalt, content of filler, temperature of
the base, thickness of layer, ambient temperature and wind velocity and as approved by the Engineer.
At no times compaction shall be performed if the temperature of the spread asphalt concrete mix is below
85 deg C.
14
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Compaction shall start by rolling in longitudinal direction from the sides to the center of the surfaced area,
overlapping on successive passes by at least half the width of the roll until thoroughly compacted and all
roller marks have disappeared.
The compaction achieved shall be adequate to obtain full strength in each course and layer and to assist
adhesion throughout the pavement.
The contractor shall establish a test strip by which a rolling pattern to assure achievement of the required
target density and the proper riding quality can be proved.
The density shall be not less than 96 % of the average density of 6 laboratory prepared specimens
according to AASHTO T 245.
3 03 01 03 03
Longitudinal and Traverse Joints
Longitudinal Joints
Offsetting of longitudinal joints in the various courses of asphalt concrete shall be at least 150 mm.
Longitudinal joints shall be rolled directly behind the spreading operation. The first lane placed shall be
true to line and grade and shall have a near vertical face. Before it is compacted, the material along
unsupported edges should be butted and slightly elevated with a tamping tool. The material being placed
in the abutting lane should be tightly crowded against the vertical face of the previously placed lane. The
loose uncompacted material should be left sufficiently high to allow for compaction to the depth of
previously rolled and compacted lane. When the abutting lane is not placed in the same day, the edge of
the lane shall be tack-coated with asphalt before placing the adjacent lane.
Traverse Joints
At the end of a day's work, the asphalt concrete pavement shall be cut off vertically so that a full depth lift
can be placed squarely against it.
Before paving is continued, the face of the traverse joint shall be tack-coated. When the paving operation
has been continued, excess hot-mix asphalt concrete shall be cleaned-off the surface and the evenness
of the joint shall be checked with a straightedge. If the joint is satisfactory, a 150 mm width of the hot-mix
asphalt concrete is rolled transversely and the joint shall be checked for smoothness. If the joint is
satisfactory, transverse rolling is continued in 150 to 300 mm wide increments until the entire width of the
roller is on the new hot-mix.
If straight edging shows an uneven joint, the surface of the newly placed asphalt concrete shall be
scarified while still warm and workable. Excess material shall be removed or additional material added,
and the joint rolled. During rolling, timbers shall be placed along the edge of a lane to prevent the roller
from driving off the longitudinal edge and distorting it.
3 03 01 03 04
Surface Tolerances
After completion of the final rolling, the smoothness of the course will be checked, and any irregularities
that exceed the specified tolerances, or that water retains on the surface, shall be corrected.
Surface variations measured from the base of the straightedge to the surface of the pavement shall not
exceed 3 mm in 3 m parallel to the centerline and not more than 6 mm in 3 m at right angles to the
centerline. Any irregularity that vary more than these tolerances shall be marked and corrected by
suitable tools before the next layer is placed. The use of a bush hammer or any other impact devices will
not be permitted.
3 03 01 04
Field Quality Control
All required tests may be performed in conjunction with the laboratory/agency contracted by the
Contractor and approved by the Engineer to inspect and supervise asphalt concrete production.
3 03 01 04 01
Uncompacted Hot-mix Asphalt Pavement
Visual inspection of each shipment prior to placing to determine unsatisfactory conditions e.g. nonuniform appearance, lean or dry mix, flushing of mix etc.
Checking supplier's delivery ticket of each delivery for completeness and compliance with supply order
and specification.
To conform compliance with the job-mix formula, samples of hot mix shall be taken at the point of delivery
and extraction tests in compliance with AASHTO T 168 or ASTM D 2172 to determine aggregate
15
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
gradation and bitumen content shall be performed for every 500 tons of asphalt concrete but at least one
analysis per day.
Test results not deviating from tolerances given in Annex 6/Table 3 will be taken as an indication for
compliance but not as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection.
3 03 01 04 02
Compacted Hot-mix Asphalt Pavement
After final compaction of asphalt concrete, samples shall be taken in compliance with AASHTO T 230
from locations as directed by the Engineer.
One set of five samples shall be taken by core drilling in compliance with AASHTO T 168 for every 200 m
run but at least for every 1000 m2 of paving.
The following tests shall be performed:
-Thickness of layers
-Density and specific gravity of asphalt concrete (AASHTO T 166). Alternatively,
density may be proved by using the nuclear method according to ASTM D 2950
-Degree of pavement compaction (AASHTO T 230)
3 03 02
Concrete Paving
3 03 02 04
Expansion and Contraction Joints
Expansion and contraction joints shall be located as indicated in the project documents and shall be
prepared as specified in Section 03300 Cast-in-Place- Concrete. For joint filling the joints shall be dry,
cleaned of scale, dirt, dust, curing compound, foreign matter prior to application. Cleaning shall be
accomplished with suitable tools designed for cleaning pavement joints. Then, the joint faces shall be
sandblasted to form a key and finally cleaned by compressed air just before primer and sealant
application. To control the depth of sealant and to support the sealant against indentation and sag, the
bottom of the joint shall be filled with a joint filler, which shall recover to maintain contact with the joint
faces when the joint is still open. A bond breaker tape shall be applied on top when recommended by the
manufacturer of the sealant or joint filler. Where a primer is recommended by the manufacturer of the
sealant or is part of the joint filling system, the primer shall be certified by the manufacturer for the
intended use and shall be applied in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. The sealant shall be
heated to and maintained at a temperature as recommended by the manufacturer and shall be pressed
into the sealing slots using suitable professional equipment according to manufacturer's instructions. The
joint shall be filled to within 3 to 5 mm below flush with the adjacent concrete pavement to a minimum
depth of 25 mm unless otherwise specified. The primer and the sealant shall be compatible with the bond
breaker tape and the joint filler. Any excess material shall be immediately scraped from the pavement
surface with suitable tools.
Before hardening and being solidified, the sealant shall be protected from damage caused by weather,
dust, traffic and any other contamination.
3 03 03
Miscellaneous Paving
3 03 03 01
Concrete Flag (Tile) Paving
Wherever possible, cutting flags shall be avoided. When necessary, it shall be carried out by using
professional tools designed for such purpose.
Concrete fill around projections and obstructions will not be allowed except where unavoidable.
3 03 03 01 01
Preparation
Before any laying operation begins, adequate edge restraints (e.g. curbs, edgings, channels or rigid
abutments) shall have gained sufficient strength to support traffic loads and allow for compaction of
bedding course.
3 03 03 01 02
Bedding on Mortar
A 1:3 cement:sand mortar shall be spread over the base course or prepared subgrade to give a thickness
of 25 mm after full compaction.
Flags shall be laid to pattern with close joints (2-4 mm) on the full mortar bed and bedded to line and level
by using a pavior's maul.
16
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Where spread mortar has begun to set without being covered by flags, it shall be removed and replaced
by fresh mortar.
When mortar has set, fine sand shall be brushed into the joints and completely filled.
3 03 03 01 03
Bedding on granular Material
Sand (See ref. 2 03 01 02) shall be spread to give a nominal thickness of minimum 25 mm after placing of
flags and shall be leveled and screeded. Flags shall be laid to pattern with close joints (2-4 mm) on the
undisturbed granular bedding material and bedded to line and level by using a pavior's maul. After
placing, fine sand shall be brushed into the joints until completely filled.
3 03 03 01 04
Surface Tolerances
Maximum permissible deviation from design level will be +- 6 mm and -0 +6 mm for flags abutting
channels or other fittings. The flatness when measured from the base of a 3 m straight-edge shall not
exceed 5 mm. The difference in level between adjacent flags shall not exceed 3 mm.
3 03 03 02
Interlocking Concrete Block Paving
3 03 03 02 01
Preparation
Before any laying and compaction begins, adequate edge restraints (e.g. curbs, edgings, channels or
rigid abutments) and any concrete haunching shall have gained sufficient strength to support traffic loads
and allow for compacting of bedding course and paving blocks. Haunching of edge restraints on the
paving face shall be vertical down to the level of the underside of the bedding course.
3 03 03 02 02
Laying
A 50 mm thick sand bedding course shall be spread over the prepared subgrade or granular base course,
leveled and compacted. When setting up screeding rails to prepare the bedding course, allowance shall
be made for the subsequent compaction of the bedding course and the pavement blocks
Then, a further 15 mm thick layer of fine sand shall be spread to create a loose surface on which paving
blocks can be laid.
Pavements sets shall be laid with close joints to pattern, line and level as indicated in the project drawings
or the like.
After compaction of the pavement blocks, fine sand shall be spread over the surface and brushed into the
joints. Revibration shall be carried out until the joints are completely filled.
3 03 03 02 03
Compaction
The paved surface shall be compacted using a plate compactor with a plate area of not less than 0,25 m2.
Transmitting force shall be not less than 75 KN/m2.
3 03 03 02 04
Surface Tolerances
Maximum permissible deviation from design level shall be +- 6 mm. The flatness when measured from
the base of a 3 m straightedge shall not exceed 10 mm at any time. The difference in level between
adjacent blocks shall not exceed 2 mm.
3 03 04
Miscellaneous Works
3 03 04 01
Concrete Kerbs and Edgings
3 03 04 01 01
Preparation
Preparation of Subgrade (See section 02200 Earthwork)
3 03 04 01 02
Placing
Kerbs, channels and edgings shall be placed on a well compacted bed of semi-dry concrete of at least
grade C 15 and lined and leveled along the top and front faces. (See Annex 6 / Figure 1). Units shall be
backed and haunched with semi-dry concrete of at least grade C 15. Construction adjacent to kerbs,
channels and edgings shall not proceed until bedding, backing and haunching have reached sufficient
strength to avoid displacement. Any movement joint in the adjacent roads and parking areas shall be
continued through the units and its beds, backing and haunching unless otherwise specified. Where
curves are to be constructed, straight units shall be used except for curves with a radius of 12 m or less.
17
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
3 03 04 01 03
ODAC
Joints
Units shall be laid with close dry joints or with joints between 5-7 mm and filled with compacted 1:4
cement:sand mortar subjected to Engineers approval.
3 03 04 01 04
Tolerances
Units shall be aligned so that they do not deviate more than 3 mm. The difference in level and alignment
of adjacent units shall not exceed 3 mm.
3 03 04 02
Pavement Marking
The surface to be painted shall cure for a period of at least 7 days for asphalt concrete and 28 days
cement concrete and shall be dry and free from loose particles. The paint shall be applied when the air
temperature is between 10 25 deg C. with relative humidity not exceeding 85% and the surface
temperature is less than 40 degC. The paint shall be applied by a professional striping equipment to give
a stripe having a wet film thickness not exceeding 0,4 mm if the average texture depth of the surface is
not greater than 1,5 mm or a stripe having a wet film thickness not exceeding 0,6 mm if the average
texture depth is greater than 1,5 mm. Before the paint starts drying, solid glass beads shall be applied
evenly at a rate of 0,40 kg/m2 to 0,50 kg/m2. All areas shall be kept free from traffic until all the painted
surfaces have dried to no pick-up by tires.
3 05 Adjusting and Cleaning

Discarded asphalt and cement concrete, remainder of cut and broken paving blocks, curbs and the like
shall be immediately collected after placing and removed off site.
3 07 Protection
All paved surfaces shall be kept free from traffic until pavement has set. For pavement not subjected to
traffic adequate precautions shall be taken to prevent any damage during construction. Curbs, edgings
and other vulnerable construction shall be protected by temporary casings when likely getting damaged
by Contractor's heavy equipment.
18
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC

4 01 General
The quantities to be paid will be measured determined from drawings.
The area surfaced is to be measured up to the bounding component where necessary.
Where work is measured by area no deductions for voids/intrusions (e.g. manhole cover etc.) shall be
made for voids not exceeding half (0.5) m2.
The width of each layer/course of material will be measured at the top of the surface.
Kerbs, edgings and channels are each given separately, stating the dimensions or type.
2
Paving and Surfacing will be measured by m for each specified material, for each specified thickness.
Curbs, edgings, channels and the like will be measured by linear m along the exposed face.
Concrete flags and pavement blocks will be measured on the exposed side of the surface
Road and pavement marking will be measured by linear m excluding gaps in intermittent markings.
Expansion joints in concrete pavement will be measured by linear m for each specified thickness
19
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC

5 01 General
Payment will be in full compensation for furnishing, hauling and placing materials, for rolling and
compacting and for all labour and use of plant, equipment, tools, traffic control, testing, samples, quality
assurance, and all other operations to perform the work, including ancillary works.
Material, which is unnecessarily wasted, disposed off site, or otherwise misused, shall be replaced at
No payment will be made for unauthorized operations.
5 02 Ancillary Works to be included in the Unit Rate

The unit rate for pavement shall include paving around openings, sloped surfaces, closing up
temporary openings, connections to existing structures by cutting and milling, preparation,
cleaning, maintaining, work laid to falls and crossfalls, for each material, of each specified course
thickness, working over and around obstructions, pipes and the like and into recesses and
shallow channels.
The unit rate for concrete curbs and edgings shall include reinforcing steel, jointing, excavation,
backfilling, sand beds, bedding mortars, other fixing materials, jointing, grouting, cleaning and
concrete bedding and haunching, for any location, for straight, curved and depressed runs.
The unit rate for flags and paving blocks shall include bedding and jointing, for any location, for
corners, and ramped and dropped crossings.
The unit rate shall include work of any width or girth, ends, angles and intersections including
special units.
The unit rate for expansion joints in concrete pavement shall include joint reinforcement (if any),
formwork, joint filling and sealing. All other movement joints will be included in the unit price rate
for concrete paving.
The unit rate for bituminous prime coats shall include blotting with sand for areas where asphalt
has not been absorbed into the base.
20
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC

6 01 Tables
6 01 01
Mineral Filler
Table 1: Gradation for Mineral Filler

Sieve size
Mass percent
passing (by
weight)
0,60 mm
100
0,30 mm
95-100
0,075 mm
70-100
6 01 02
Asphalt Concrete
Table 2: Typical Composition of Asphalt Concrete
Sieve Size
Mix design and Nominal maximum size of aggregate

37.5 mm
25 mm
19mm
12.5mm
9.5mm
Total percentage passing ( by weight )

50 mm
100
37.5 mm
90-100
100
25 mm
90-100
100
19 mm
56-80
90-100
100
12.5 mm
56-80
90-100
100
9.5 mm
56-80
90-100
4.75 mm
23-53
29-59
35-65
44-74
55-85
2.36 mm
15-41
19-45
23-49
28-58
32-67
1.18 mm
0.60 mm
0.30 mm
4-16
5-17
5-19
5-21
7-23
0.15 mm
0.075 mm
0-5
1-7
2-8
2-10
2-10
Biturmen Asphalt cement

(conventional Mixes)
3-8
3-9
4-10
4-11
5-12
21
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
6 01 03
ODAC
Tolerances
Table 3: Tolerances from Job-mix Formula

Sieve Size
Tolerances, %
in. (12.5 mm) and larger
+/- 8
3/8 in. (9.5 mm) and No. 4 (4.75 mm)
+/- 7
No. 8 (2.36 mm) and No. 16 (1.18 mm)
+/- 6
No. 30 (600 micrometer) and No. 50 (300 microm.)
+/- 5
No. 200 (75 micrometer)
+/- 3
Bitumen content, weight % of total mixture
+/- 0.5
Biturmen
6 01 04
Temperature Range
Asphalt cement
(conventional Mixes)
250 to 325
121.1 to 162.
Kerbs, Channels and Edgings
Table 4: Concrete Kerbs, Channels (gutters), and Edgings

Table : Transverse strength of kerbs, channels and edgings
Depth as tested
(see note:1)
Width as tested
Failing load
(see note:2)
Mm
mm
kN
150
305
22.2
125
150
8.0
125
255
13.3
50
255
3.1
50
205
2.7
50
150
2.0
255 to 150
10.3
Dropper Kerbs
125
NOTE 1- Units are placed in the testing machine with the depth as tested being the smallest
dimension.
NOTE 2- The failing load for kerbs of various lengths may be obtained by extrapolation. e.g. if
the failing load for a 125 mm X 255 mm X 915 mm kerb tested on a span of 750 mm is 13.3
kN, the failing load for a 550 mm kerb of the same cross section tested on a span of x mm
will be 13.3 X (750/x) kN.
NOTE 3- Outlet kerbs. Quadrants and angle kerbs are not tested for transverse strength.
22
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
6 02 Figures
6 02 01
Edgings and Kerbs
Fig. 1: Typical section through a paved footway with rear edging
23
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Fig. 2: Types of kerbs
24
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Fig. 3: Types of kerbs, shapes
25
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Fig. 4: Edgings and angle kerbs
02 02
Crossings
26
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Fig. 5: Ramped crossing
Fig. 6: Dropped crossing
27
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Fig. 7: Ramped crossing with over-run areas using small element flaps
28
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
6 02 03
ODAC
Corners
Fig. 8: Runout corner
29
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Fig. 9: New town corner
30
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Annex: Specific Information

7 01 Concrete Flags (Tiles)
Table 1: Flag sizes according to BS 7263 Part 1
Tile size
Tile type
Nominal Dim.
mm
Actual Dim.
mm
Thickness
mm
600 X 450
598 X 448
50 OR 63
600 X 600
598 X 598
50 OR 63
600 X 750
598 X 748
50 OR 63
600 X 900
598 X 898
50 OR 63
450 X 450
448 X 448
50 OR 70
400 X 400
398 X 398
50 OR 65
300 X 300
298 X 300
50 OR 60
Table 2: Transvers strength of flags according to BS 7263 Part 1
Transverse strength of flags

Minimum failing load for thickness
Tiles type
A
B,C,D
E
50 mm
60 mm
63 mm
65 mm
70 mm
KN
KN
KN
KN
KN
8.3
12.7
11.1
16.9
18.8
9.6
9.1
9.6
15.4
13.8
31
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
7 02 Interlocking Concrete Blocks (Pavers)
32
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 02660 Water Distribution
Division
02 Sitework
Section
Part 1: General
1 01 Summary
performing all operations in connection with the water distribution of potable water on building sites.
Water distribution for fire fighting purposes is not part of this section.
1 01 01
1 01 04
Section Includes
01.0
Water supply pipelines and accessories
02.0
Water storage facility
Related Section
02200 Earthwork
03300 Cast-in Place Concrete
03400 Precast Concrete
04200 Unit Masonry
07100 Waterproofing
15410 Plumbing Piping
15430 Plumbing Specialities
15440 Plumbing Fixtures
15450 Plumbing Equipment
16000 Applicable Sections of Division 16 - Electrical
1 02 References
1 02 01
1 02 01 03
International Standards
1 02 01 03 01
International Standard Organization (ISO)

ISO 2850 : 75
Centrifugal Pumps
ISO 2531 : 98
Pipelines
Ductile Iron Pipes, Fittings and Accessories for Pressure
ISO 4179 : 85 Ductile Iron Pipes for Pressure and Non-Pressure Pipelines
Centrifugal Cement Mortar Lining General Requirements
ISO 4422-1 : 96 Pipes and Fittings Made of Unplasticized Poly (Vinyl Chloride)
(PVC-U) for Water Supply Specifications - Part 1: General
(PVC-U) for Water Supply Specifications - Part 2 : Pipes (with or without
Integral Sockets)
(PVC-U) for Water Supply Specifications - Part 3: Fittings and Joints
ISO 4422-4 : 97 Pipes and Fittings made of Unplasticized Poly (Vinyl Chloride)
(PVC-U) for Water Supply Specifications- Part 4: Valves and ancillary
equipment
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
ISO 4422-5 : 97 Pipes and Fittings made of Unplasticized Poly (Vinyl Chloride)
(PVC-U) for Water Supply Specifications- Part 5: Fitness for Purpose of the
System
ISO 4427 : 96
Polyethylene (PE) Pipes for Water Supply
ISO 4633 : 96 Rubber Seals Joint Rings for Water Supply Pipelines
Specifications for Materials
ISO 6708 : 95
Size)
Pipework Components Definition and Selection of DN (Nominal
ISO 7268 : 84
Pipe Components Definition of Nominal Pressure
ISO 7370 : 82 Glass Fibre Reinforced Thermosetting Plastics (GRP) Pipes and
Fittings Nominal Diameters and Standard LengthsISO 12162 : 95 Thermoplastics Materials for Pipes and Fittings for Pressure
Applications Classification and Designation Overall Service (Design)
Coefficient
ISO/TR 4191 : 89
for laying
UPVC pipes for water supply Recommended practice
1 02 01 04
USA Standards
1 02 01 04 01

ASTM C 33 : 93
Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates
ASTM D 1527 : 99
Standard Specification
Styrene (ABS) Plastic Pipe, Schedule 40 and 80
for
Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-
ASTM D 1785 : 99
Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Plastic Pipe, Schedule 40, 80, 120
ASTM D 2104 : 99
Pipe, Schedule 40
Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic
ASTM D 2235 : 96
Standard Specification for Solvent
Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Plastic Pipe and Fittings
Cement
for
ASTM D 2239 : 99
Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastic Pipe
(SIDR-PR) Based on Controlled Inside Diameter
ASTM D 2282 : 99
Styrene (ABS) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR)
for
ASTM D 2241 : 96
Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR Series)
ASTM D 2464 : 96
Standard Specification for
Chloride)(PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80
Threaded
Poly
(Vinyl
ASTM D 2466 : 96
Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride)(PVC)
Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40
ASTM D 2467 : 96
ASTM D 2468 : 96
Standard Specification for Acrylonitrilr-Butidiene-Styrene
(ABS) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40
ASTM D 2564 : 96
Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly
(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems
ASTM D 2666 : 96
Plastic Tubing
Standard Specification for Polybutylene (PB)
ASTM D 2672 : 96
Standard Specification for Joints for IPS PVC Piping
Using Solvent Cement
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
ASTM D 2855 : 96
Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints
with Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings
ASTM D 3000 : 95
Standard Specification for Polybutylene (PB) Plastic
Pipe (SDR-PR) Based on Outside Diameter
ASTM D 3035 : 95
Pipe (SDR-PR) Based on Controlled Outside Diameter
ASTM D 3139A : 96
Standard Specification for Joints for Plastic Pressure
Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals
ASTM F 402 : 93
Standard Practice for Safe Handling of Solvent
Cements, Primers, and Cleaners Used for Jointing Thermoplastic Pipe and
Fittings
ASTM F 645 : 95
Standard Guide for Selection, Design, and Installation of
Thermoplastic Water Pressure Piping Systems
1 02 01 04 02
American Water Works Association

AWWA C 104 : 95
for Water
Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings
AWWA C 105 : 93
Systems
Polyethylene
Encasement
for
Ductile-Iron
Piping
AWWA C 110 : 93
Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings, 75 mm Through 1200
mm, for Water and other Liquids
AWWA C 111 : 95
Fittings
Rubber Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and
AWWA C 151 : 91
Liquids
Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water or other
AWWA C 200 : 91
Steel Water Pipe 150 mm and Larger (Second Edition)
AWWA C 206 : 91
Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe
AWWA C 500 : 93
Metal-Seated Gate Valves, for Water Supply Service
AWWA C 504 : 94
Rubber Seated Butterfly Valves
AWWA C 508 : 93
through 600 mm NPS
Swing-Check Valves for Waterworks Service, 50 mm
AWWA C 509 : 94
Resilient Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service
AWWA C 510 : 92
Double Check Valve Backflow-Prevention Assembly
AWWA C 511 : 92
Assembly
Reduced-Pressure
AWWA C 600 : 93
Appurtenances
Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their
Principle
Backflow-Prevention
AWWA C 605 : 94
Underground Installation of Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)
Pressure Pipe and Fittings for Water
AWWA C 651 : 92
Disinfecting Water Mains
AWWA C 900A : 92
Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) pressure Pipe, 4
inch through 12 inch, for Water
AWWA C 901 : 88
Polyethylene (PE) Pressure Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings,
inch through 3 inch, for Water
AWWA M 14 : 90
Recommended Practice for Backflow Prevention and
Cross-Connection Control
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
1 02 01 06
ODAC
British Standards
BS 534 : 90
sewage
Specification for steel pipes, joints and specials for water and
BS 1710 : 89
Identification of pipelines and Services
BS 3505 : 98
identical with ISO 4422
BS 4346
Joints and Fittings for use with unplasticized PVC pressure pipes
BS 4346-1 : 98 Injection molded unplasticized PVC fittings for solvent welding

for use with pressure pipes, including potable water supply
BS 4346-2 : 98 Mechanical joints and fittings, principally of unplasticized PVC
BS 5480 : 90 Specification for glass reinforced plastics (GRP) pipes, joints and
fittings for use for water supply or sewerage
BS 6700 : 97 Design, Installation, Testing of Services Supplying Water for
Domestic Use within Buildings and Their Curtilages
BS-EN 545 : 95 Ductile iron pipes, fittings, accessories and their joints for water
pipelines. Requirements and test methods
1 02 01 07
German Standards
DIN 8075 : 99
Polyethylene (PE) pipes
DIN-EN 12201 : 96
1 02 02
Plastic piping systems for water supply
Codes
BS 8007 : 87 Code of practice for design of concrete structures for retaining
aqueous liquids
1 02 03
Other References
ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineers
MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry
127 Park St NE, 22180 Vienna, VA; USA
IAPMO International Association of Plumbing Officials and Mechanical Officials
2001 Walnut, California, USA
1 03 Definitions
1 03 01
Technical Terms
Air release valve a valve to release air which tends to accumulate at high
points on pipelines
Butterfly valve a circular disc fitted inside a pipe and hinged at two pivots on a
diameter axis
Centrifugal pump a rotodynamic pump with an impeller of primarily radial
design (SASO 1305)
Coating a durable material applied to the external surface of pipes and fittings
to protect the external surface from corrosion.
Collar (or coupling) connecting piece used to join together the spigots (plain
ends) of mating pipes or fittings
Design pressure the maximum sustained internal pressure that the system is
to be subjected to under normal operating conditions
Discharge valves valve in a pipeline for increasing or reducing the flow
Drain valves valve provided at low points for allowing water to escape when
the piping system is to be emptied
4
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Flexible joint a joint capable of allowing relative movement between the

component parts (e.g. socket and spigot joints with an elastomeric sealing
element or a clamped joint, for example a bolted coupling) (BS 5480)
Float valves valve actuated by a float in a fluid container
Gate valves valve those closes or regulates the flow in a pipeline by a plate
sliding at right angles to the flow
Gasket sealing component of a joint
Head the potential energy of water due to its height above a given level.
Initial backfill layer of fill immediately above the crown of the pipe. (See Annex
6/Figure 1
Lining a durable material applied to the internal surface of pipes and fittings to
protect the surface from corrosion or chemical attack.
Maximum working pressure - maximum anticipated sustained operating
pressure
Mechanical joint flexible joint, with compression sealing rings (gasket), in
which sealing is obtained by applying pressure to the sealing ring by mechanical
means, e.g. clamps, glands, etc.
Non-return valve valve that prevents reversal of flow (backflow prevention)
Pressure rating (PR) the estimated maximum pressure that the medium in the
pipe can exert continuously with a high degree of certainty that failure of the pipe
will not occur (ASTM F 771 and others)
Pressure pipe a pipe to be used with internal pressure greater than 0,5 bar
Pressure reducing valve valve that reduces the pressure of a fluid
Pressure sustaining valve valve that maintains a predetermined pressure
upstream of its position in a pipeline
Rigid joints a joint which does not allow angular deflection and has an
incorporated resistance to axial loading (e.g. butt jointed and flanged joints; a
threaded joint; a solvent cement joint) (BS 5480)
Side fills filling material between bedding material and initial backfill (see
Annex 6/ Figure 1
Solenoid valve electrically operated control valve, used to activate a hydraulic
valve
Stop valve a valve to stop or start the flow of water, usually in a pipe
Swing-check valve a non-return valve with a freely rotatable closure actuated
by the resultant forces on both sides
System design pressure the maximum sustained internal pressure that the
system is to be subjected to under normal operating conditions
Surge a sudden increase of pressure in a pipeline resulting from closing a
valve at its lower end
Tapping valve a special gate valve designed with end connections and an
unobstructed waterway to provide positioning of a tapping sleeve, valve, and
machine for tapping pipe dry or under pressure (AWWA C 500)
Water hammer a shock wave created by a fast-closing valve
Working pressure the maximum pressure which a piping system can sustain
in continuous use under given service conditions without pressure surge (ISO
4422)
5
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
1 03 02
ODAC
Abbreviations
DN
6708)
nominal size which is common to all components in a piping system (ISO
DR
Dimension ratio
IPS
internal pipe size
min
minutes
MH
manhole
NPS
nominal pipe size
PN
nominal pressure expressed by a number, which is used for reference
purpose. (ISO 7268)
PMA allowable maximum operating pressure, including surge, that a
component can safely withstand in service (ISO definition)
PR
Pressure ratio
SDR
Standard dimension ratio
1 04 System Description
1 04 02
Performance Requirements
The water distribution system shall be installed to avoid waste, undue consumption, misuse and
contamination of water and to avoid trapping of air during filling and the formation of air locks during
operation.
Precautions shall be taken to minimize the effects of ground movement on the pipes and fittings which
may occur due to other underground operations, settlement, slope stability failures or otherwise.
The installation shall not adversely affect the quality of drinking water:
-by materials in contact with the water being unsuitable for the purpose
-by cross-connection between pipes conveying water with pipes conveying water
from some other source
-as a result of backflow of water from water fittings, into pipework connected to
mains.
-by stagnation of water, particularly at high temperatures
Where the method of jointing, pipe bedding and trench backfilling is inadequate to prevent longitudinal
movement, provide thrust restraints designed to resist the thrusts produced by the test pressure when
testing the piping system.
1 05 Submittals
In compliance with Conditions of Contract and provisions, the following shall be submitted thirty (30) days
before water distribution works are scheduled to commence.
1 05 01
Product Data
Manufacturers product specification and recommended installation instructions for each item to be
furnished and installed include manufacturers certifications showing compliance with requirements.
Manufacturers operating and maintenance requirements if applicable. Product data shall include principal
dimensions, general construction and material for each item intended to be furnished and installed by the
Contractor. Information of maintenance requirements for valves, pumps, water meter and the like.
1 05 02
Shop Drawings
Shop drawings for water tank(s), pump station if any, sump pits, inspection chambers, manholes, thrust
blocks, and the like. Shop drawings for valves; valve boxes, pressure gauges, and the like. Longitudinal
section profile drawings showing pipe sizes and manholes, locations, elevations, and other piping in the
6
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
same trench, including connections to the public water supply. Diagrammatic drawing(s) identifying all
valves and their function.
1 05 03
Samples
Accompanying the above submittals, the Contractor shall submit samples of each item of adequate size
and construction.
1 05 04
Documented experience of Contractors site supervisor. Records and reports of Contractors Internal Q.C.
Records and reports of Contractors External Q.C. Records and reports of Contractors field Q.C.
available to the Engineer not later than three (3) days after testing and checking. Reports and records
shall be established and maintained in a manner to ensure traceability. Arrangements shall be made in
Contractors work schedule and time allowed for checking and testing as indicated.
1 06 01
Qualifications
Contractors site supervisor shall have knowledge of referenced standards and at least five (5) years of
documented experience in works related to water supply and shall have successfully completed works
similar in design, material, and extent to that indicated in the Project. Installers shall be familiar with the
material and installation procedures indicated and shall be skilled and trained. Contractors personnel
performing disinfection of the water distribution system shall be familiar with the physiological, chemical,
and physical properties of the chemicals being used and shall be trained and equipped to handle any
emergency which may arise.
1 06 03
Certifications
For all pipes, fittings, components, materials which are used for the transport of, or intended for contact
with potable water, provide a third-party certificate issued by a testing agency acceptable and approved
by the local water authority, confirming that the use for this purpose is safe and will not harm. The
evaluation of the testing agency shall be in accordance with requirements including but not limited to
chemical extraction, taste, and odor. A similar certificate shall be provided by the Contractor after
disinfection of the water distribution system indicating that the water quality is equal or better than that
required for the water of the public water supply.
1 06 04
Quality Control
1 06 04 01
Checking of suppliers test certificates and certificates of compliance to conform to specification and
referenced standards prior to first delivery. Checking of suppliers delivery tickets of each delivery for
completeness and compliance with supply order and specification.
Checking of markings and labels and condition of pipes, components, and water supply equipment of
each delivery, particular to ensure that:
-Pipes, components and equipment are undamaged
-Protective coatings and linings of pipes and fittings are undamaged
-Where pipes are provided with factory applied jointing material, jointing material
is in proper condition
Checking if equipment and tools are in a serviceable conditions at least every week. Checking of the
correct storage of pipes, components, and water supply equipment at least every week. Checking of pits
and trenches to ensure that excavation is to the correct depth to guard against mechanical damage due
to traffic or any other activity prior to any pipe bedding and pipe laying operation. As work proceeds and
prior to any backfilling operation, checking line and level of pipes, irregularities at joints, the correct fitting
of valves together with any other equipment and accessories specified, including the correct installation of
thrust blocks where required. Checking of all pipework to ensure that it has been securely fixed, at least
7
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
every week, however, prior to any backfilling operation. Checking that valve and hydrant boxes are
properly aligned, that suitable operating keys are provided, and in case of deep valves, that adequate
extension spindles are installed prior to handing over. Field Quality Control as indicated.

1 07 01
Whether moved by hands, hoists, or other acceptable method, pipes, components and equipment shall
not be thrown, dropped, dragged, bumped, or allowed to impact on objects that cause damage.
1 07 02
Package units on the ground shall be protected by appropriate pieces of timber. When unloading
individual pipes, the pipes shall be placed on wooden supports, placed about one-fifth of the length of the
pipe from each end. Rubber gaskets and similar material shall be stored in their original containers and
kept away from oil, grease, direct sunlight, sources of ozone such as fluorescent light and electric motors,
excessive heat and areas where temperatures exceed 60 deg.C. All plastic pipes and similar material,
components, and equipment shall be kept away from direct sunlight.

1 08 01
Existing Conditions
Protect all existing utility lines, overhead or underground, from damage due to any construction activity.
Identify and determine unexpected variations to subsoil conditions, water sources, or discovery of
uncharted utility lines or other facilities. Repair any damage to existing utility lines or other facilities and
pay all associated costs.
1 08 02
Comply with any applicable portion of local environmental regulations pertaining to water supply works on
building sides.
8
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Part 2: Products
2 01 Pipes and Fittings
All pipes, pipe fittings material and components shall be compatible with each other and shall be
designed and manufactured for the intended use, pressure, and temperature. All jointing material shall be
of material, composition and size that will not damage the pipe and shall be suitable for use at the design
pressure for the pipeline.
All pipes, fittings and their joints, in permanent or temporary contact with water intended for human
consumption, shall not change the quality of that water to such an extent that it fails to comply with the
requirements of the water authority.
No pipe, fitting or water storage facility shall be lined internally with coal tar or any material that includes
coal tar.
2 01 01
Thermoplastic Pipes
2 01 01 01
PVC Pipes
The material from which pipes and fittings are made shall conform to the applicable requirements of the
Standard(s) indicated and shall have a minimum required strength (MRS) of 25 MPa in compliance with
ISO12162.
Fittings shall be made either for solvent cement joints or elastomeric sealing ring type joints (push-in or
mechanically fixed) as indicated and shall comply with one of the following Standards as appropriate:
ISO 4422-3; ASTM D 2466; ASTM D 2467; AWWA C 900 ; or equivalent.
Adapter fittings shall be flanged type unless otherwise indicated.
PVC pipes shall comply with the following Standard(s):
01.0
SASO 14, unplasticized Poly Vinyl Chloride (uPVC) pipe, spigot and
socket type, pipe diameter as indicated,
01.1
Class 1, for non-pressure applications
01.2
Class 2, nominal pressure 4 bar.
01.3
01.4
01.5
01.6
Jointing flexible joints with push-in elastomeric sealing rings.
02.0
ISO 4422 unplasticized Poly (vinyl chloride) (PVC-U) pipe, spigot and
socket type, for potable water supply, pipe diameter as indicated,
02.1
nominal pressure (PN) 5 (SDR 41)
02.2
nominal pressure (PN) 6 (SDR 34,4)
02.3
nominal pressure (PN) 6,3 (SDR 33)
02.4
02.5
02.6
nominal pressure (PN) 12,5 (SDR 17)
02.7
Jointing: rigid joints, solvent cemented in compliance with ISO
7387-1 and ISO 9311-1 as applicable.
02.8
Jointing flexible joints with push-in elastomeric sealing rings.
Rings to comply with ISO 4633.
03.0
type,
ASTM D 1785 Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) plastic pipe, spigot and socket
9
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
03.1
schedule 40, pressure rating (PR) to comply with system design
pressure, pipe diameter as indicated.
03.2
03.3
03.4
Jointing: rigid joints, solvent cemented, in compliance with ASTM
D 2672 and ASTM D 2855 as applicable.
03.5
Jointing: flexible joints with push-in elastomeric sealing rings in
compliance with ASTM D 3139.
04.0
ASTM D 2241 Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) plastic pipe, spigot and socket
type, pressure rating (PR) to comply with system design pressure, pipe diameter
and standard dimension ratio (SDR) as indicated.
04.1
Jointing: rigid joints, solvent cemented in compliance with ASTM
D 2672 and ASTM D 2855 as applicable.
04.2
Jointing: flexible joints with push-in elastomeric sealing rings in
compliance with ASTM D 3139 and ASTM D 2855 as applicable.
05.0
AWWA C 900 Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) plastic pipe, spigot and socket
type, dimension ratio (DR) and pressure rating (PR) to comply with system
design pressure, pipe diameters as indicated.
05.1
Jointing: Flexible joints with push-in elastomeric sealing rings or
compression gasket rings in compliance with ASTM D 3139 as
applicable
2 01 01 02
Polyethylene Pipes (PE) Pipes
LDPE (low-density) pipes have certain flexibility while HDPE (high-density) Pipes are rigid. The material
from which the pipes and fittings are made shall conform to the applicable requirements of the
Standard(s) indicated. Fittings shall be made either for solvent cement joints, elastomeric sealing ring
type joints (push-in or mechanically fixed), or coupling sleeve joints as indicated and shall comply with
one of the Standard(s) as appropriate: AWWA C 901 or equivalent
Polyethylene (PE) pipes shall comply with the following Standard(s):
01.0
SASO 1401 polyethylene pipe, pipe diameter as indicated,

01.1
Type LDPE (low density),
01.2
Type HDPE (high density),
01.3
Class 1, nominal pressure up to 2,5 bar.
01.4
Class 2, nominal pressure up to 4 bar.
01.5
01.6
01.7
01.8
Jointing: compression sealing ring, mechanically fixed by
proprietary non-corrosive compression fittings.
02.0
ISO 4127 Polyethylene (PE) pipes for water supply, allowable hydrostatic
pipe design stress to comply with water supply system design stress, pipe
diameter as indicated.
02.1
Jointing: rigid joints, fusion welded.
02.2
10
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
03.0
AWWA C 901 Polyethylene (PE) pressure pipe, for water, pressure
classes and dimension ratio (DR) to comply with system design pressure, pipe
diameters as indicated.
03.1
03.2
Jointing: compression sealing ring mechanically fixed by
04.0
ASTM D 3035 Polyethylene (PE) plastic pipe (DR-PR). Based on
controlled outside diameter, pressure rating (PR) and dimension ratio (DR) to
comply with system design pressure, pipe diameters as indicated.
04.1
04.2
05.0
ASTM D 2239 Polyethylene (PE) plastic pipe (SIDR-PR), pressure rating
(PR) and standard dimension ratio (SDR) to comply with system design pressure,
pipe diameters as indicated.
05.1
05.2
06.0
ASTM D 2104 Polyethylene (PE) plastic pipe, Schedule 40, pressure
rating (PR) to comply with system design pressure, pipe diameters as indicated.
06.1
06.2
07.0
DIN 8075 Polyethylene (PE) pipes, pipe diameter as indicated,

07.1
PE-HD type, for non-pressure applications.
07.2
material designation (PE 63, PE 80, PE 100) as indicated.
07.3
07.4
Jointing: compression sealing rings mechanically fixed by
proprietary non-corrosive compression fittings
2 01 02
Cast Iron Pipes
2 01 02 01
Ductile Cast Iron Pipes
Pipes and fittings shall be made by any type of foundry process or manufactured by fabrication of cast
components. All pipes shall be externally coated and internally lined unless otherwise indicated. The
internal lining shall be made of cement mortar and shall constitute a dense, homogeneous layer, covering
the total internal surface of the pipe barrel. The internal lining shall be factory applied by a centrifugal
spinning process or a centrifugal spray head or a combination of both, minimum thickness 3,5 mm up to
DN 300, 5 mm from DN 350 to DN 600, 6 mm from DN 700 to DN 1200, and 9 mm for DN 1400 to DN
2000 unless otherwise indicated in applied Standard(s). The 28 day compressive strength of the cement
mortar lining shall be not less than 50 MPa. When approved by the Engineer, internal lining may be
alternately made of polyurethane, epoxy, or a cement mortar lining with a seal coat in compliance with
approved Standards.
External coating shall be zinc, covered with a finishing layer of bituminous material or synthetic resin
compatible with zinc, minimum thickness of finishing layer 70 micron. Both layers shall be factory applied.
The zinc shall be applied on oxide-surfaced pipes after heat treatment or on blast-cleaned pipes;
minimum zinc thickness 130 g/m2.
When approved by the Engineer, external coating may be alternately made of polyethylene sleeving (as a
supplement to the bituminous paint or the zinc coating), epoxy coating, or adhesive tapes in compliance
with approved Standards.
11
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Fittings shall have a similar external coating and internal lining as the pipes and shall comply with one of
the following Standards as appropriate:
SASO 1020; ISO 2531; BS-EN 545; AWWA C 110; or equivalent
Ductile cast iron pipes shall comply with the following Standard(s):
01.0
SASO 1014/SASO1020, with external coating and internal lining,

01.1
Spigot and socket type, thickness class designation (K value) to
comply with system design pressure, pipe diameter as indicated.
01.2
Jointing: flexible joints, with push-in elastomeric sealing rings.
01.3
Plain-ended type, thickness classes designation (K value) to
01.4
Jointing: compression sealing rings, mechanically fixed by
proprietary non-corrosive compression fittings or ductile cast-iron pipe
collar with push-in elastomeric sealing rings
02.0
SASO 1018, flanged type, with external coating and internal lining,
thickness class designation (K value) to comply with system design pressure,
pipe diameter as indicated.
03.0
ISO 2531ductile cast-iron pipe, with external coating and internal lining,
03.1
spigot and socket type, thickness class designation (K value) to
03.2
Jointing: flexible joints, with push-in elastomeric sealing rings
03.3
Plain-ended type, thickness classes designation (K value) to
03.4
Jointing: compression sealing rings, mechanically fixed by
proprietary non-corrosive compression fittings or ductile cast iron pipe
collar with push-in elastomeric sealing rings.
03.5
With flanged ends, thickness classes designation (K value) to
03.6
Jointing compression flange gasket in compliance with ISO 7483
flanges bolted.
04.0
lining,
BS-EN 545 ductile cast iron pipe, with external coating and internal
04.1
Spigot and socket type, thickness class designation (K value) to
comply with system design pressure, allowable maximum operation
pressure (PMA) depending on pipe diameter.
04.2
Jointing flexible joints, with push-in elastomeric sealing rings.
04.3
plain ended (spigot) type, thickness class designation (K value)
to comply with system design pressure, allowable maximum operating
04.4
proprietary non-corrosive compression fittings or ductile cast iron pipe
collar with push-in elastomeric sealing rings.
04.5
With flanged ends, thickness class designation (K value) to
comply with system design pressure, allowable maximum operating
04.6
Jointing compression flange gasket in compliance with ISO 7483
flanges bolted.
05.0
AWWA C 151 ductile-iron pipe, with external coating and internal lining,
pipe class designation to comply with system design pressure, pipe diameter as
indicated.
12
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
05.1
2 01 03
Jointing: rubber gasket joints in compliance with AWWA C 111.
Glass Reinforced Plastics (GRP) Pipes
GRP Pipes shall be made of a thermosetting resin reinforced with a fibrous reinforcement. Additional
material like aggregates, fillers, additives, and pigments may be used in compliance with approved
Standards.
The internal surface of the pipe or fitting shall be smooth and both the internal and external surface shall
be clean and free from any imperfection that would impair compliance with requirements established in
the relevant Standards. All GRP fittings shall be equal or superior in performance to pipe of the same
classification. Pipes and fittings for use with potable water shall be factory marked in an appropriate
manner.
GRP pipes and fittings shall comply with the following Standard(s):
01.0
BS 5480, glass reinforced plastic pipe and fittings,

01.1
type G (under gravity, internal pressure up to 0,5 bar), pipe
diameter as indicated.
01.2
pressure rated, pressure rating to comply with system design
01.3
Jointing: flexible joints, with push-in elastomeric sealing rings or
compression sealing rings, mechanically fixed by proprietary noncorrosive clamps or collars.
01.4
Jointing: rigid joints as solvent cemented socket and spigot joints
or flanged joints as approved by the Engineer.
2 01 04
Steel Pipes
Steel pipes shall be made as welded or seamless carbon steel pipes. Joints shall be sleeve joints for
welding, slip-on type couplings, flanged joints, or threaded joints as indicated. Pipes and fittings shall
have a factory-applied external coating and an internal lining. The external coating shall be bitumen
sheathing, bitumen enamel wrapping, coal tar wrapping or plastic sheeting consisting of an adhesive
undercoat, minimum thickness 0,1 mm, and a seamless sheath of polyethylene, minimum sheath
thickness 0,6 mm. The internal lining shall be factory-applied bitumen, concrete or cement mortar, or any
other material in compliance with approved Standards. The ends of all coated and lined pipes shall be
sealed by a suitable protection in form of plugs, discs, caps, or plastic sheeting to exclude foreign matters
and damages during shipment, storage and handling. Depending of the type of joint and applied pipe
Standard, external coating and/or internal lining shall have the coating and lining stopped back a distance
sufficient to permit assembly of the joint without damage to the lining. Steel pipes shall comply with the
following Standard(s):
01.0
BS 534 steel pipes, with approved external coating and internal lining,
01.1
Jointing welded sleeve joints or slip-on type couplings.
01.2
Jointing welded flanges.
02.0
AWWA C 200 steel water pipe, 150 mm and larger, with approved
external coating and internal lining, pipe diameter as indicated.
02.1
Jointing: welded lap joints, or approved butt-strap joints in
compliance with AWWA C 206
02.2
Jointing welded flanges in compliance with AWWA C 206.
2 02 Valves
2 02 01
General
Valves shall be made of cast-iron, brass, bronze, thermoplastic as indicated or, when not indicated, as
approved by the Engineer. The valve pressure rating shall comply with design pressure of the water
distribution system. Jointing of valves shall be by one of the following methods as appropriate and in
compliance with manufacturers recommendation:
13
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
-Solvent-cemented joints
-Elastomeric sealing ring joints (push-in or mechanically fixed)
-Flanged joints
A valve box shall be provided for every valve that has no gearing or operating mechanism or in which the
gearing or operating mechanism is fully protected with a gear case. The valve box shall not transmit
shock or stress to the valve and shall be centered over the operating nut of the valve, with the box cover
set flush with the finished surface of the surrounding area unless otherwise indicated. Valve box
extensions shall be of length required for depth of buried valves.
Valve box cover shall have lettering Potable Water in Arabic and English.
2 02 02 01
Gate Valves
01.0
Gate vales up to DN 75 shall have a brass or bronze body, non-rising
stem, inside screw, single wedge or disk, control rod, extension box and valve
key. Jointing to fit adjoining pipework.
02.0
Gate valves DN 75 and larger shall have a cast iron body, bronze trim,
non-rising stem with square nut, single wedge, control rods, extension box and
valve key.
Gate valves shall comply with AWWA C 500 or approved equal.
Jointing to fit adjoining pipework.
03.0
Gate valves DN 75 and larger shall have a cast iron body, bronze trim,
non-rising stem with square nut, single wedge, resilient seat, control rod,
extension box and valve key.
Gate valves shall comply with AWWA C 509 or approved equal.
04.0
Gate valves DN 50 and smaller shall have a body and screw bonnet of
ASTM B 62 bronze, with solid wedge, non-rising copper-silicon alloy stem, brass
packing gland, Teflon impregnated packing, and a malleable iron handwheel.
Gate valves shall comply with MSS SP-80 or approved equal.
2 02 02 02
Ball Valves
Ball vales up to DN 50 shall have a brass body, Teflon coated brass ball, rubber seats and stem seals,
control rod, T-stem pre-drilled for control rod, extension box and valve key. Jointing to fit adjoining
pipework.
2 02 02 03
Butterfly Valve
Butterfly valves from DN 50 to DN 600 shall have a cast iron body, bronze disc, resilient replaceable seat,
water or lug end, position lever handles. Butterfly valves shall comply with AWWA C 504 or an equivalent
standard. Jointing to fit adjoining pipework.
2 02 02 06
Check Swing Valve
Swing check valves from DN 50 to DN 600 shall have a cast iron body, bronze trim, and swing disc, disc
and seat shall be replaceable. Swing check valves shall comply with AWWA C 508 or an equivalent
standard. Jointing: to fit adjoining pipework.
2 02 02 07
Air Release Valve
Air release valves shall have a cast iron body and cover, bronze internal parts, and a stainless steel float.
2 02 03
Backflow Prevention Unit
Backflow prevention unit shall be a complete assembly of two independently acting spring-loaded check
valves, with body, cover and trim made of bronze and a relief valve, with bronze body and stainless steel
trim. Shut-off valves shall be provided at each end of the unit.
14
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
All parts and components shall be accessible for examination, repair and replacement.
01.0
Backflow prevention unit shall comply with AWWA C 510 or an
equivalent standard.
02.0
Backflow prevention unit shall comply with AWWA C 511 (reduced
pressure principle) or an equivalent standard.
2 03 Pumps
Pumps shall be sized so that each pump is capable of overcoming the static lift plus the friction losses in
the pipework and valves. All pipework connections to and from pumps shall be adequately supported and
anchored against any thrust to avoid stress on pump casings and to ensure proper alignment. Pumps
shall have flexible connections and anti-vibration pads.
2 03 01
Centrifugal Pumps
The pump shall be single or multistage pump, including driver, base plate, coupling, in compliance with
SASO 1305 or an equivalent standard.
2 04 Accessories
2 04 01
Trace Wire
Trace wire shall be made of a magnetic detectable conductor, coloured, with plastic covering, imprinted
with the words Potable Water or otherwise approved by the Engineer. Imprint shall be in Arabic and
English. The trace wire shall have a width of approx. 300 mm unless otherwise specified.
2 04 02
Granular Pipe Bedding Material
Granular pipe bedding material includes single-size granular material, graded granular material, sand, allin aggregates, and crushed aggregates. Granular material shall be fine aggregate in accordance with BS
882, ASTM C 33 or an equivalent standard.
Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, the grading shall conform to the overall limits given in Table
1 / Annex 6
2 04 03
Water Meter
Water meters shall be of volumetric type unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, suitable for water
temperature up to 50 deg. C. The casing and its component shall be made of brass, bronze, grey cast
iron, plastics, or any other material confirming to the requirements of the approved Standard. Water
meters shall have an internal strainer and dry dial. The flow rate shall be between 1,5m3/h and 15 m3/h,
depending on diameter of end connection. Water meters shall comply with the requirements of the local
municipality and the standard ; SASO 238 or an equivalent standard.
2 04 04
Manholes
2 04 04 01
Construction
01.0
Reinforced precast concrete sections in compliance with ASTM C 478 or
equivalent, designed and formed with male and female ends, with provision for
rubber gasket joints, minimum compressive strength 27,5 MPa (4000 psi),
manhole top (concentric cone, eccentric cone or flat slab top) as indicated, top of
cone to match grade rings, resilient connectors between manhole, pipes and
laterals.
01.1
Including base riser section and separate base slab.
01.2
Including base riser section with integral floor.
02.0
Reinforced cast-in place concrete as specified in Section 03300,
manhole design as shown on drawings or otherwise indicated, minimum concrete
compressive strength 27,5 MPa (4000 psi)
03.0
Concrete brick/block units, modular size minimum average compressive
strength 24,1 MPa (3500 psi) unless otherwise indicated manhole design as
shown on drawings or otherwise indicated.
15
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
04.0
Clay manhole brick units, modular size manhole design as shown on
drawings or otherwise indicated minimum average compressive strength 21 MPa
(3000 psi) unless otherwise indicated.
For excavation and backfilling see Section 02200 Earthwork.
2 04 04 02
Manhole Cover and Frame

01.0
Grey cast iron construction, machined flat bearing surface, removable
cover, in compliance with SASO 413, live load rating and nominal sizes as
indicated.
02.0
cover, boltable unless otherwise indicated, minimum tensile strength 207 MPa
(min. class 30 B ASTM A 48), with 100 mm minimum width flange, closed surface
or open checkerboard grille as indicated.
03.0
Cast iron construction, in compliance with EN 124, machined flat bearing
surface, removable cover, boltable unless otherwise indicated, vented, minimum
vent area > 5% up to 600 mm clear opening and >140 cm2 for clear openings >
600 mm, nominal sizes as indicated,
2 04 04 03
03.1
Class A 15 (test load 15 KN) where indicated.
03.2
Class B 125 (test load 125 KN) where indicated.
03.3
Class C 250 (test load 250 KN) where indicated.
03.4
Class D 400 (test load 400 KN) where indicated.
03.5
Class E 600 (test load 600 KN) where indicated.
03.6
Class F 900 (test load 900 KN) where indicated.
Manhole Steps
Shall be made of cast iron, epoxy coated, and non-slip finishing, designed to support a concentrated load
of 227 kg, at 300 mm intervals unless otherwise indicated.
Minimum treads length 300 mm, minimum tread width 25 mm unless otherwise indicated.
2 04 05
Thrust Blocks
Thrust blocks shall be made of concrete and shall withstand the thrust forces acting on them. Cement
used for concrete shall be type V.
The magnitude of thrust which act on the thrust block shall be calculated by multiplying the values given
in Table 2 / Annex 6 by the test pressure (bar) intended to apply on the system or parts thereof. Concrete
thrust blocks shall have a compressive strength not less than 13,8 MPa after 28 days.
2 05 Water Storage Facilities

2 05 01
Concrete Water Storage Tanks
2 05 01 01
Underground water tanks shall be made of watertight reinforced concrete.

Concrete strength shall be not less than 35 N/mm2 (characteristic cube strength after 28 days) unless
otherwise indicated.
Where walls or ground slabs are founded on the ground, a concrete blinding layer, minimum thickness 75
mm, concrete class C 20 shall be provided. Where aggressive soil or aggressive groundwater can be
expected, the blinding concrete shall be at least class C 25, and a sulphate resisting or other special
cement shall be used.
The nominal cover of concrete for all steel, including stirrups, links, sheathing, and spacers shall be not
less than 40 mm. A greater cover may be necessary in contact with aggressive soils or subject to erosion
or abrasion. In thin sections where it is not possible to achieve 40 mm cover a higher cement content or
special reinforcement may be used as approved by the Engineer.
16
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
The internal tank surface shall be coated with a material suitable and approved for use in contact with
drinking water.
The ground slab of the tank shall permit thermal expansion and contraction. A separation layer of not less
than 1000g/m2 polyethylene sheet shall be provided between the floor slab and the blinding concrete bed.
Any tank or tank compartment shall have at least one access hatch, minimum size 600 mm x 900 mm,
lockable in both open and closed position.
Metal ladders, walkways, step iron etc. shall be corrosion resistant and shall not adversely affect the
quality of the drinking water.
Provisions shall be made for adequate ventilation to limit any possible dangerous accumulations to
acceptable limits.
Pipe connections to the concrete underground tank shall be made with flanged connections. The
connections shall be properly aligned both in the horizontal and vertical planes when being cast into the
concrete.
Every pipe supplying water to a water tank shall be fitted with a float-operated valve or another approved
level control device to control the inflow of water and maintain it at the required level. Such device shall
be marked with water pressure, temperature and other characteristics for which it is intended to be used.
The water level shall be at least 25 mm below the lowest point of the warning pipe connection or, if no
warning pipe is fitted, at least 50 mm below the lowest point of the lowest overflow pipe connection.
The water tank shall have a pump sump of adequate size and shall be fitted with a washout pipe. The
washout pipe shall not be connected to a drain but may be arranged to discharge into open air when
approved by the Engineer.
The underground water storage tank shall be constructed according to the Contract plans/drawings.
Design and installation shall comply with requirements established in BS 6700 or an equivalent Standard.
2 05 01 02
Movement and Construction Joints
All movement joints shall be designed and installed to accommodate repeated movement of the structure
without loss of water. Water pressure on the joints shall be adequately resisted.
Movement joints may be designed and installed as expansion joint or contraction joint.
Construction joints shall be only executed where indicated in the structural design or as approved by the
structural designer.
2 05 01 03
Internal and External Waterproofing
Internal and external waterproofing shall be as shown on Contract plans/drawings or otherwise indicated.
17
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Part 3: Execution
Immediately before laying, examine accessories, each pipe and joint again for soundness and cleanliness
and make sure that material and surfaces, which form part of a joint, are clean and dry before
commencing their assembly. All defective material shall be replaced.
Check that the position and levels of existing drains and services have been established.
Check that trench lines do not encroach on routes of other services and obstructions.
Investigate if there is a risk of unplanned extraneous water entering drain pits and trenches and
investigate to determine the extent of this risk and provide adequate protection.
Make an assessment of the soil on the site to detect any contamination.
Provide and fix clear, stable markers and reference points for lines and levels.
Hand trim excavations to required elevations.
Establish the centerline and width of trenches and locate manholes, inspection chambers, etc. and
ensure that proper branch drain alignments can be achieved.
3 03 Installation
3 03 01
General
All buried pipelines shall be buried in a way to withstand the full loading of backfilled soil and all traffic
loading indicated and expected.
Where pipes are generally provided with flexible joints, locate joint positions as closely as practicable to
the external faces of structures, manholes, inspection chambers and the like, through which the pipes are
laid. Where pipes are generally laid with rigid joints and there is no specified provision for flexible joints at
the above positions, get instructions of the Engineer, if it is required that such provisions are necessary.
During installation work, excavations shall be kept free from water, e.g. rainwater, seepage water, spring
water or water from leaks from pipelines. Methods of dewatering shall not affect the embedments and
pipelines. Precautions shall be taken to prevent loss of fine bedding and filling material.
On completion of dewatering, any temporary drains shall be adequately sealed.
All metal water pipes shall be bonded to the electrical installation main earth terminal as near as possible
unless otherwise indicated.
No pipe or fitting shall be laid in, on, or through foul soil, refuse, sewer, drain, cesspool or refuse chute, or
any manhole connected with them.
3 03 02
Trench Excavation and Backfilling
See Section 02200 Earthwork unless otherwise indicated
3 03 03
Pipe Installation
3 03 03 01
Preparation of Trench Bottom
The trench bottom shall be constructed to provide a firm, stable, and uniform support for the full length of
the pipe.
Trench bottom shall be as narrow as possible, but not less than the external diameter of the pipe plus 300
mm, so that the sides of the pipes and fittings can be correctly compacted.
Mud, rock projections, boulders, hard spots and local soft spots shall be removed and replaced with
selected fill material and compacted.
Unless otherwise indicated, a layer of fine granular pipe bedding material, minimum thickness 100 mm,
shall be applied (see Figure 1 / Annex 6). In rock conditions this bedding layer shall be minimum 150 mm
thick.
18
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
3 03 03 02
ODAC
Pipe Laying
Foreign material and dirt on pipes and fittings that cannot be removed by normal flushing shall be cleaned
by mechanical means.
As each length of pipe is placed on the fine granular bedding layer, the joint shall be assembled and the
pipe brought to required line and level.
Socket holes in the pipe bedding shall be provided at each joint position, deep enough to prevent the
weight of the pipe and the load upon it bearing on the socket, collar, or coupling.
Foreign material shall be prevented from entering the pipe while it is being placed on the bedding layer.
Any necessary adjustment to level shall be made by raising or lowering the bedding, always ensuring that
pipes are finally provided with the minimum thickness of bedding layer and full support along their whole
length.
Unless otherwise indicated or appropriate, the pipes shall be laid with the socket end pointing in direction
of work progress.
After laying, the pipes shall be secured with side fill material compacted into successive layers of 100 mm
maximum, however the joints shall not be covered before final hydraulic testing. (See Figure 1 / Annex 6)
The placement of side fill and initial backfill shall only be commenced when pipe joints and the bedding is
in a condition to permit loading.
Side fill shall be fine granular pipe bedding material or when approved by the Engineer- selected
material as specified in Section 02200 Earthwork.
Minimum thickness of initial backfill shall be 300 mm above the pipe barrel unless otherwise indicated and
shall be selected material as specified in Section 02200 Earthwork
Side fills and initial backfill shall be carefully compacted. For general trench backfilling and compaction
see Section 02200 Earthwork.
3 03 03 03
Jointing
3 03 03 03 01
General
All proprietary joints shall be made in accordance with manufacturers instructions.

When making joints by welding or cementing, precautions shall be taken to avoid the risk of fire, and care
taken to avoid inhalation of fumes from the jointing process.
All burrs shall be removed from the ends of pipes and any jointing material used shall be prevented from
entering the water distribution system.
All piping and fittings shall be cleaned internally and shall be free from particles of sand, soil, metal filings,
chips, etc.
No metal pipe shall be connected by any other pipe or fitting by means of an adhesive where the metal
pipe is buried in the ground.
When joints have to be made between pipes or fittings of different materials, adapter couplings shall be
used
3 03 03 03 02
Flexible Push-on Joints
Push-on joints comprise an elastomeric sealing ring which is automatically compressed and which forms
a seal when the spigot end is inserted into the socket.
The elastomeric sealing ring shall be located in the socket. The rings to be used shall be those supplied
by the manufacturer for his own assembly system. If the sealing ring is not in place at the time of delivery,
clean the groove, remove any foreign matters and locate the ring correctly in the groove prior to placing of
the pipe. The spigot end shall be chamfered and lubricated together with the sealing ring according to
manufacturers recommendations prior to insertion into the socket. The lubricant shall be part of the
proprietary assembly system or shall comply with pipe manufacturers recommendations for potable water
supply piping. The spigot end shall be inserted into the socket up to the reference mark made by the
manufacturer. If pipes are cut on site, the cut shall have square end and the end shall be chamfered by
methods recommended by the manufacturer
19
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
3 03 03 03 03
ODAC
Mechanically Fixed Joints
The elastomeric sealing ring shall be compressed by means of an external, proprietary tightening system.
Care shall be taken not to over-tighten the elastomeric sealing ring, which is in contact with the pipe. For
light thermoplastic pipes, an internal sleeve may be inserted to increase their rigidity before jointing.
3 03 03 03 04
Solvent Cement Joints
According to the nature of the adhesive and the clearance tolerances between spigot and socket ends,
manufacturers instructions shall be followed. However, the following shall be observed in general. Do not
smoke in the area in which solvent cement is used. Apply solvent cement in a well ventilated space. The
solvent cement shall have the required viscosity. It shall not be diluted and shall not contain any
substance, which is likely to affect the taste or odour of the water, nor have a toxic effect, nor encourage
the growth of bacteria. Cut spigot ends square to its axis and chamfer the end. The surfaces to be
cemented shall be clean, dry, and free from grease. Apply the solvent cement in an even layer in a
longitudinal direction, but with a thicker coating on the spigot end. Cementing shall be performed quickly.
Smudges of solvent cement shall be removed as soon as the joint has been made. Once the joint is
made, leave it to dry without disturbing according to manufacturers instructions. Special bonding
techniques shall be used for pipe diameters of DN 200 and above.
3 03 03 03 05
Flanged Joints
The joint is obtained by compression of a gasket or sealing ring placed against the flange. The flanges
may be assembled by adhesive, bolting, or welding.
3 03 03 03 06
Welded Joints
Welded joints shall be fabricated so that a protective lining or coating could not be damaged by heat.
Welded joints shall be lap joints, butt-strap joints, or sleeve joints as indicated.
Lap Joints:
Lap joints shall be single welded unless otherwise indicated. Joints shall be assembled so that welding
seams in adjacent pipe sections are offset from each other by at least five times the thickness of the
thinner of the pipes being joined.
Lap joints of the spigot and socket type shall be fabricated so that when properly assembled, the
maximum clearance of facing surfaces and weld location restrictions indicated in reference standards will
not exceed.
Butt-strap Joints:
Where butt-strap joints are used, the butt straps shall have a minimum plate thickness equal to the
thinnest pipe or fitting member being joined and shall be fabricated from material equal in chemical and
physical properties to the thinnest member being joint.
Strap width shall be not less than 102 mm for pipes less than diameter DN 900 and 152 mm for pipes of
diameter DN 900 and larger. The minimum lap between pipe ends and the edge of the butt strap shall be
25 mm for pipes less than diameter DN 900 and 50 mm for pipe diameter DN 900 and larger.
Lap joints and butt-strap joints shall comply with AWWA C 206.
Sleeve Joints:
Pipes shall be supplied with spigot ends parallel and sleeve ends either parallel or with the diameter
tapered to approximately 0,8 mm per 25 mm length of sleeve. The minimum length of sleeve shall be 75
mm.
The sleeve shall be sized to ensure that the spigot end will enter the sleeve freely and be engaged by the
sleeve socket when fully home.
When the Contractor intends to fabricate individual sleeve joints, each sleeve shall be provided with a
tapped hole, fitted with a matching plug. The tapped holes shall be within the end 30 mm of the sleeves
and be clear of any possible welding runs.
Sleeve joints shall comply with BS 534.
20
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
3 03 03 04
ODAC
Pipe Anchoring with Thrust Blocks
Anchoring thrust blocks shall be placed against the pipes at each change of direction and at tees, plugs,
caps, bends, valves, hydrant branches, and the like.
The mass of the block and/or the area of bearing on the pipe (or fitting) and on the ground shall be so that
thrust restraint is achieved by transferring the thrust force to the soil structure outside the pipe in such a
manner that joint separation will not occur in unrestrained joints.
Unless otherwise indicated, the area of bearing shall be calculated by using the data given in Table 3
/Annex 6.
All concrete thrusts shall be placed to permit full access to pipes and fittings.
To prevent bond between the thrust block and the pipe, a polyethylene sheet shall be interposed.
For direction of possible thrust forces see Figure 3 and Figure 4 / Annex 6.
3 03 03 05
Trace Wiring
Install trace wire continuous over the top of every buried pipeline.
3 03 04
Installation of Valves
Install valves on a concrete base centered and plumb over wrench nut in compliance with manufacturers
recommendations.
Install every valve so that it is accessible for examination, maintenance and operation by means by which
it is designed to be operated.
Any valve box cover shall be fixed by removable fastenings.
3 03 05
Identification
Surface valve boxes shall be marked to indicate what service is below them. Durable corrosion resistant
identification labels with stamped or set-in indexes shall be fixed to indicate the pipe service, the size, the
position and depth below surface.
Identification labels shall be in Arabic and English.
3 03 06
Filling and Flushing
Lines shall be filled slowly with potable water at a maximum velocity of 0,3 m/sec while venting all air.
Precautions shall be taken to prevent entrapping air in the pipelines.
After filling, pipelines shall be flushed at blow-off and dead ends at a minimum velocity of 0,9 m/sec.
A minimum of three changes of potable water shall be used as flushing operations.
Valves shall be closed slowly to prevent surge while maintaining positive pressure at all times throughout
the pipeline.
Flushing water shall be discharged to natural drainage channels, storm water sewers, or proper
reservoirs as approved by the local water authority. Such discharge of water shall be in a manner that
prevents property damage, erosion, or siltation.
3 03 07
Disinfection
3 03 07 01
General
The water distribution system shall be thoroughly flushed prior to commencement of the disinfection
procedure. The water distribution system or parts of the system or a section of a pipe shall not be used
during the disinfection procedure and all outlets shall be marked with adequate warning in Arabic and
English. Chemicals used for disinfection of drinking water installations shall be those which are listed,
approved and certified. Disinfection chemicals shall be used only :
-In combination with appropriates professional equipment to provide a controlled
concentration to the water to be disinfected.
21
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
-Under the direct supervision of a person who is familiar with the physiological,
chemical, and physical properties of applied chemicals, and who is trained and
equipped to handle any emergency that may arise.
-When appropriate safety precautions are prepared and observed to protect
working personnel and the public.
After disinfection the system, or parts of the system or a section of a pipe, the piping network shall be
immediately flushed so often until measurements show that the concentration of chemicals in the water is
not higher than that generally prevailing and accepted in the public water supply. Any new water pipes
shall be kept isolated from existing water distribution pipes until satisfactory bacteriological samples have
been taken and tests are completed. The bacteriological test results shall certify that the water sampled
and tested is free from coliform bacteria contamination, and to be equal or better than the water quality
required by the local water authority.
The disinfection procedure shall follow the method(s) and Standard(s) indicated.
3 03 07 02
Disinfection according to AWWA C 651
Possible forms of chlorine used for disinfection shall be liquid chlorine, sodium hypochlorite solution and
calcium hypochlorite granules.
Chlorination shall be carried out by one of the following methods:
Tablet Method:
Place calcium hypochlorite granules or tablets at the upstream end of a section of pipe, at the upstream
end of each branch, and at 150 m intervals as pipes are being installed. The quantity of chlorine granules
to be used shall be as given in Table 4 / Annex 6. When using calcium hypochlorite tablets instead of
granules, a 5-gram tablet shall be placed in each section of pipe and each appurtenance. The number of
tablets to be used shall be given in Table 5 / Annex 6. The tablets shall be attached by food-grade
adhesive inside and at the top of the pipe, with approximately equal numbers of tablets at each end of a
given pipe length. If the tablets are attached before the pipe section is placed in the trench, their position
shall be marked so that it can be readily determined that the pipe is installed with the tablets at the top.
When installation has been completed, the system, or a part of the system or a pipe section shall be filled
with water at a rate such that water within the pipe will flow at a velocity not greater than 0,3m/s.
Precautions shall be taken that all air pockets are eliminated. The water shall remain in the pipe for at
least 48 hours. Warning: The tablet method shall not be used on solvent cemented plastic or on screwed
steel pipes because of the danger of fire or explosion from the reaction of the joint compounds with
calcium hypochlorite!
Continuous-Feed Method:
Place calcium hypochlorite granules in pipe sections during installation to provide a strong chlorine
concentration in the first flow of flushing. The flushing velocity shall be not less than 0,76 m/s. After
flushing, the system, or a part of the system or a pipe section shall be slowly filled with potable water and
chlorinated at a constant rate of chlorine such that the water will have not less than 25 mg/liter free
chlorine. Table 6 /Annex 6 gives the amount of chlorine required for each 30 m of pipe section of various
diameters. Solutions of 1% chlorine may be prepared with sodium hypochlorite or calcium hypochlorite.
The latter solution requires 450 grams of calcium hypochlorite in 30 liters of water.The equipment for
chlorinating shall be a solution feed vacuum-operated chlorinator and a booster pump. After 24 hours, the
treated water in all portions of the pipe section shall have a residual of not less than 10 mg/liter free
chlorine. During the 24 hour period all valves and appurtenances shall be operated to ensure disinfection.
For pipe diameter DN 600 and larger, a special procedure shall be agreed between the Contractor and
the Engineer.
Slug Method:
Place calcium hypochlorite granules in the pipe section during installation to provide an adequate chlorine
concentration in the first flow of flushing. The flushing velocity shall be not less than 0,76 m/s. After
flushing, the system, or a part of the system or a pipe section shall be slowly filled with potable water and
chlorinated at a rate such that the water shall have not less than 100 mg/liter free chlorine. The chlorine
shall be applied continuously and for a sufficient period of time to develop a solid column, or slug of
chlorinated water that will expose all interior surfaces of pipes and appurtenances for at least 3 hours.
The free chlorine residual shall be measured in the slug as it moves through the pipe section. If at any
time the concentration drops below 50 mg/liter, the flow shall be stopped and the chlorination equipment
22
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
relocated at the head of the slug. As flow of water is resumed, additional chlorine shall be applied to
restore a concentration not less than 100 mg/liter. As chlorinated water flows, all valves and
appurtenances shall be operated to ensure disinfection.
3 03 07 03
Disinfection according to BS 6700
The pipe section shall be filled with chlorinated water at an initial concentration of 50 mg/liter for a period
of 1 hour. If the free residual chlorine measured at the end of this period is less than 30 mg/liter, the
disinfection process shall be repeated. When approved disinfectants other than chlorine are being used,
the pipe section shall be filled with the approved disinfectant solution at the initial concentration and for
the period of time as specified by the manufacturer. If the residual of the approved disinfectant at the end
of this period is less than the manufacturers recommendation, the disinfection procedure shall be
repeated.
3 03 08
Water Storage Facilities
3 03 08 01
Concrete Water Storage Tanks
Shall comply with requirements of Section 03300 Cast In Place Concrete.
3 03 09
Manholes and Inspection Chambers
3 03 09 01
General
Carry out the construction of manholes, inspection chambers, etc. in close sequence with pipe laying and
in accordance with drawings. Build in channels for the whole length of the manhole or inspection
chamber, using the same material as for the pipeline unless otherwise indicated. When bedding items of
PVC or similar material on a cementious bedding, use special clips or provide a mechanical key to the
PVC items in accordance with manufacturers instructions. Form any concrete benching required
vertically from the channel to the height of the soffit of the outlet, then form a radius of 25 mm and rise
with a slope of approximately 1in 12 to the walls of the manhole. Finish benching smooth. Apply on all
external masonry surfaces a cement plaster and a bituminous waterproofing for all surfaces in contact
with soil.
3 03 09 02
Brickwork Construction
Before commencing brickwork, construct a concrete slab base at least 150 mm thick, concrete class C 25
unless otherwise indicated.
Construct walls at least 200 mm thick. Fill joints with cement mortar at least 4 mm but not more than 6
mm thick, flush jointed as the work proceeds.
For further requirements see Section 04200 Unit Masonry and Division 03 Concrete.
3 03 09 03
Precast Concrete Construction
Ensure that precast concrete units are vertical and correctly aligned. Either ensure that there is a full bed
of cement mortar in the joints and finish jointing flush internally, or use proprietary jointing material in
accordance with manufacturers instructions.
3 03 09 05
Step Irons
Fix step irons into manholes at every fourth course or at intervals of between 230 mm and 300 mm so
that the top step is not more than 750 mm below the surface and the bottom step not more than 450 mm
above the benching. Maintain the steps at constant intervals. Stagger step irons in two vertical rows at
300 mm centres.
3 03 09 06
Cover Frames
Except for pre-fitted cover frames and unless otherwise indicated, bed the cover frame and immediately
insert the lid in position ensuring the bed mortar is still plastic.
Bed the cover frame solidly in cement mortar over the whole of the seating area.
23
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC

3 04 01
General
Initial testing of pipelines may be required by the Engineer before any backfilling is placed. However, for
final acceptance, the pipeline, water storage tanks, and any other equipment shall be tested after
backfilling.
Arrange the timing of tests as follows:
Initial tests: as soon as practicable after completion of a particular section, with particular attention to all
work, which will be buried or concealed.
Final tests: to be carried out on completion of all work on the water distribution system and prior to
handing over.
Satisfactory completion of an initial test does not constitute a final test. Items failing any test shall be
corrected immediately and re-tested before further work proceeds.
3 04 02
Visual Inspection
Carry out general inspection both during progress of works and of the complete installation. These
inspection shall include but shall not be limited to:
-Checking pits and trenches to ensure that excavation is to the correct depth to guard against mechanical
damage due to traffic or any other activity prior to any pipe bedding and pipe laying operation.
-As work proceeds and prior to any backfilling operation, checking line and level of pipes, irregularities at
joints, the correct fitting of valves together with any other equipment and accessories specified, including
the correct installation of thrust blocks where required.
-Checking all pipe work to ensure that it has been securely fixed prior to backfilling .
-Checking that valve and hydrant box are properly aligned prior to backfilling .
-Checking that suitable operating keys are provided, and in case of deep valves, that adequate extension
spindles are installed prior to handing over.
-Checking and carrying out performance tests on any connected item to check that they meet the
specified requirements.
3 04 03
Hydraulic Testing
3 04 03 01
General
The installation to be tested shall be inspected for compliance with drawings and specifications.
Significant variations shall be investigated and corrected, if required by the Engineer, before proceeding
with the test. To avoid the risk of contamination, water used for testing shall be potable water from the
public water supply system unless otherwise indicated.
Pipes shall adequately anchored by means of thrust blocks and/or side fills prior to hydraulic testing.
Manometers shall be calibrated according to the level at which they are used.
All defects revealed by the test shall be rectified and a new test shall be carried out until a satisfactory
result is obtained.
Hydraulic testing shall comply with Standard(s) and regulations as indicated.
3 04 03 02
Hydraulic Testing according to BS 6700
The pipes shall be slowly and carefully filled with water so that all air is expelled, and then, tested under
pressure in accordance with clauses given for rigid or elastomeric pipes depending on the material from
which the pipeline is constructed.
The system shall be subjected to twice the maximum working pressure of the pipeline.
3 04 03 02 01
Test Procedure for Rigid Pipes
After being vented, the pipework shall be slowly filled with water and subjected to the required test
pressure. Where there are significant differences between the ambient temperature and the water
24
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
temperature, there shall be an initial period of 30 min before the commencement of the test period, to
permit temperature equilibrium after the test pressure has been applied. There shall be no visible leakage
of water and the test pressure shall be maintained for a test period of one (1) hour.
3 04 03 02 02
Test Procedure for Elastomeric Pipes
After being vented, the pipework shall be slowly filled with water and shall be subjected to the required
procedures of test procedure A or test procedure B. The selection of test procedure shall be agreed by
the Engineer.
Test Procedure A:
-Apply the required test pressure by pumping, in accordance with Figure 5 / Annex 6, for a period of 30
min. Inspect the pipework to identify any visible leaks in the system.
-Reduce the pressure in the pipework by draining water from the system to 0,5 times the maximum
working pressure.
-Close the drain valve. If the pressure remains at, or greater than, 0,5 times the maximum working
pressure, the system is regarded as leak-tight.
-Visually checks for leakage and monitor for 90 min. The test criteria are met if there is no reduction in
pressure.
Test Procedure B:
-Apply the required test pressure by pumping, in accordance with Figure 6 / Annex 6, for a period of 30
min and note the pressure in the pipeline at the end of the period. Inspect the pipework to identify any
visible leaks in the system. Continue the test without further pumping.
-Note the pressure after a further 30 min. If the pressure drop is less than 60 kPa (0,6 bar), the system
can be considered to have no obvious leakage.
-Visually check for leakage and monitor for 120 min. The test criteria are met if the pressure drop in the
system is less than 20 kPa (0,2 bar)
3 04 03 03
Hydraulic Testing according to AWWA Regulations
3 04 03 03 01
PVC Pipes
Hydraulic Testing shall comply with AWWA C 605.
3 04 03 03 02
PE Pipes
Hydraulic testing shall comply with AWWA C 901.
3 04 03 03 03
Ductile Cast-Iron Pipes
3 04 03 03 04
Steel Pipes
3 04 03 04
Hydraulic Testing according to ISO TR 4191
The test pressure shall not exceed 1,5 times the rated pressure for the weakest part of the pipeline. All
intermediate control vales shall be open throughout the duration of the test. If a network is tested by
sections, the ends shall be temporarily closed by means of suitable joints. Air vents at high points shall be
open during the filling of the network.
Slowly fill the pipes with potable water starting from the lowest point, thus avoiding water hammer and
removing all air. Once the network has been completely filled with water, leave the pipeline to rest for 24
hours. Close the air vents and carry out an initial inspection to check that all the joints are leak-tight.
Slowly increase the pressure, using a hand pump, until the required pressure is obtained. A preliminary
application of pressure for 15 min may be made before the test, so that the elements in the pipeline can
settle. For pipelines with diameters of DN 600 or larger, motor pumps shall be used.
25
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Isolate the pipeline from the test pump for at least 1 hour. The test is considered satisfactory if the
quantity of water required for re-establishing the required pressure does not exceed the quantity
calculated by the formula: 3 Liter per kilometer of pipe, per 25 mm of internal diameter, per 0,3 MPa (3
bar) of test pressure, and per 24 hours. For pipe sections not exceeding 30 m in length and 63 mm in
diameter, the pressure loss after the test period of 1 hour shall not exceed 0,05 MPa (0,5 bar).
3 04 04
Recording Results of Field Quality Control
For every test and visual inspection, record the following information and provide copies to the Engineer
as required:
-The location of pipeline or other item inspected or tested and the date of the
inspection or test.
-The results
-The personnel involved
3 06 Demonstration
Instruct Employers personnel in the operation and maintenance of the water distribution system and
demonstrate the content of the manuals furnished.
3 07 Protection
Protect completed sections of pipelines, equipment and accessories and all other work from damage by
construction traffic and work of other trades.
26
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC

4 01 General
The quantities to be paid for will be measured from drawings.
Pipes of differing material and size, special lining or coating etc. will be measured separately.
All items, which are measured by linear meter, will be measured parallel to the base upon which they are
placed.
For measurement of excavation and general backfilling see Section 02200 Earthwork.
Pipes of different diameter will be measured by length (linear meter) between the inside face of
manholes, but over all bends, branches, valves, adapters and the like, giving the depth of the pipeline in
depth-range stages.
Bends, branches, valves, adapters and the like will be enumerated as extra-over the pipeline in which
they occur.
Concrete thrust blocks will be enumerated.
Water storage tanks, manholes, and inspection chambers will be enumerated, indicating size,
accessories, plaster, waterproofing, special internal lining and the like.
Manhole covers including frame will be enumerated, indicating type, material, size etc.
Accessories e.g. pump and other equipment will be enumerated, indicating type, size, quality,
performance criteria, etc.
Trace wiring will be measured by linear meter.
27
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC

5 01 General
Payment will be made for complete work including furnishing all material necessary, equipment, tools,
storage facilities, water, power, and for all labour including samples, cutting, jointing, co-ordination work
with other trades, checking, testing, quality assurance, filling, flushing and protecting and including but not
limited to ancillary works as indicated below.
Material, which is unnecessarily wasted, disposed off site, or otherwise misused, shall be replaced on
Material, which does not conform to specification requirements, shall be removed and replaced on
When a complete structure or unit e.g. a water storage tank, manhole and the like is specified as the unit
of measurement, the unit will include all necessary fittings and accessories.

Keeping trenches and excavation pits free of water at all times until final handing over.
Connections to public mains or other existing piping.
Pipework support e.g. planking, sheeting, and strutting and the like.
Pipe bedding and side fill shall be included in the pipe laying operation.
Hydraulic testing and disinfecting.
Identification of pipes and valves.
Certifications.
Bacteriological tests.
Preparation of shops drawings.
Preparation of working drawings.
28
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC

6 01 Tables
Table 1: Fine Aggregate for Granular Pipe Bedding
Percentage by mass passing BS sieve
Sieve size
Additional limits for grading
Overall
limits
10.00 mm
100
5.00 mm
89 - 100
2.36 mm
60 - 100
1,18 mm
60 - 100
65 - 100
80 - 100
30-100
30-90
45-100
70-100
0.60 mm
15 - 100
15 - 54
25 - 80
55 - 100
0.30 mm
5-70
5-40
5-48
5-70
0.15 mm
0-15
Table 2: Thrust per Bar Internal Pressure

Nominal internal
diameter of pipe
mm
End thrust
Radial thrust on bends of angle KN
90o
45o
22.5o
1.25o
50
0.38
0.53
0.29
0.15
0.7
75
0.72
1.02
0.55
0.28
0.15
100
1.17
1.66
0.90
0.46
0.24
125
1.76
2.49
1.35
0.69
0.35
150
2.47
3.5
1.89
0.96
0.49
175
3.29
4.66
2.52
1.29
0.65
200
4.24
5.99
3.24
1.66
0.84
225
5.27
7.46
4.04
2.06
1.04
250
6.43
9.09
4.92
2.51
1.26
300
9.38
13.26
7.18
3.66
1.84
350
12.53
17.71
9.59
4.89
2.46
29
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Table 3: Bearing Capacity of Soils (to determine thrust block sizes)

Soil type
Safe bearing load

kN/m2
Soft clay
24
Sand
48
Sandstone and gravel
72
Sand and gravel bonded with

clay
96
240
Table 4:Calcium HypoChlorite Granules Placed at the Beginning and End of Pipe
Section
Calcium Hypochlorite Granules
Pipe Diameter
Inch
mm
ounce
(100)
0.5
(14)
(150)
1.0
(28)
(200)
2.0
(57)
12
(300)
4.0
(113)
16 and larger
(400) and larger
8.0
(227)
Table 5:Number of 5-g Hypochlorite Tablets Required
Length of Pipe Section, ft (m)

Pipe diam.
Number of 5-g Calcium Hypochlorite Tablets
inch
mm
100
150
200
10
250
12
300
16
400
10
13
*Based on 3.25-g available chlorine per tablet; any portion of tablet rounded to next higher integer.
30
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Table 6:Chlorine Required to Produce 25-mg/Litre Concentration in 30 m of Pipe

Pipe Diameter
100 percent Chlorine
in.
(mm)
lb
(100)
.013
(150)
(g)
1 percent Chlorine Solution

gal
(L)
(5.9)
.16
(0.6)
.030
(13.6)
.36
(1.4)
(200)
.054
(24.5)
.65
(2.5)
10
(250)
.085
(38.6)
1.02
(3.9)
12
(300)
.120
(54.4)
1.44
(5.4)
16
(400)
.217
(98.4)
2.60
(9.8)
31
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
6 02 Figures
Fig. 1: Standard Pipe Installation Method
32
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Fig.2: Example of Movement Joints in Water Storage Tanks (from BS 8007)
33
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Fig. 3: Possible Directions of Thrust
Fig. 4: Examples of Direction of Thrust
34
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Fig. 5: Pressure Testing / Test Procedure A (BS 6700)
Fig. 6: Pressure Testing / Test Procedure B (BS 6700)
35
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 02700 Sewerage and Drainage
Division 02 - Sitework
Section
02700 - Sewerage and Drainage
Part 1: General
1 01
Summary
The work covered by this section consists of providing all tools, labour, equipment, scaffolding and
materials and performing all operations in connection with sewage, stormwater and subsoil drainage
outside buildings on building sites.
Piping below buildings is deemed to be included in this Section, provided it does not form part of the
piping system of the building.
1 01 01
1 01 04
Section Includes
01.0
Sanitary Sewerage (Gravity System)
02.0
Stormwater Drainage (Gravity System)
03.0
Subsoil Drainage
04.0
Sanitary Sewerage (Pressure System)
05.0
Stormwater Drainage (Pressure System)
06.0
Water Treatment (Drainage Field System)
Related Sections
02200 Earthwork
02500 Paving and Surfacing
02810 Irrigation
02900 Landscaping
04200 Unit Masonry
07100 Waterproofing
09200 Lath and Plaster
15400 Plumbing
16000 Applicable Sections of Division 16: Electrical
1 02
References
1 02 01
1 02 01 03
1 02 01 03 01

ISO 161-1 : 96 Thermoplastics pipes for the conveyance of fluids - Nominal
pressures - Part 1: Metric series
ISO 265-1 : 88 Pipes and fittings of plastic material - Fittings for domestic and
industrial waste pipes - Basic dimensions: Metric series - Part 1: Unplasticized
Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC-U)
ISO 559 : 91
Steel tubes for water and sewage
ISO 2531 : 91
Ductile iron pipes, fittings and accessories for pressure pipelines

1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
ISO 3514 : 76
Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride (CPVC) Pipes and Fittings
ISO 4179 : 85 Ductile iron pipes for pressure and non-pressure pipelines Centrifugal cement mortar lining - General requirements
ISO 4433-1 : 97 Thermoplastic pipes - Resistance to liquid chemical classification
- Immersion test method
ISO 4435 : 91 Unplasticized poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC-U) pipes and fittings for
buried drainage and sewerage systems
ISO 4633 : 96 Rubber seals - Joint rings for water supply, drainage and
sewerage pipelines - Specification for materials
ISO 5256 : 91 Steel pipes and fittings for buried or submerged pipelines
External and internal coating by bitumen or coal tar derived
material
ISO 6594 : 83
Cast iron drainage pipes and fittings - Spigot series
ISO 6708 : 95
Pipework components - Definitions and selection of DN
ISOTR 7073 : 88 Recommended techniques for the installation of unplasticized

poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC-U) buried drains and sewers
ISO 7186 : 96
Ductile iron products for sewage applications
ISO 7268 : 83
Pipe components - Definition of nominal pressure
ISO 7370 : 83
fittings
GRP pipes reinforced thermosetting plastics (GRP) pipes and
ISO 8179-1 : 95 Ductile iron pipes - External zinc coating - Part 1:Metallic zinc
with finishing layer
ISO 8179-2 : 95 Ductile iron pipes - External zinc coating -Part 2: Zinc rich paint
with finishing layer
ISO 8180 : 85
Ductile iron pipes - Polyethylene sleeving
ISO 8572 : 91 Pipes and fittings made of glass-reinforced thermosetting

plastics (GRP) - Definitions of terms relating to pressure, including relationships
between them, and terms for installation and jointing
ISO 8772 : 91 High-density polyethylene (PE-HD) pipes and fittings for buried
drainage and sewerage systems - Specifications
ISO 8773 : 91 Polypropylene (PP) pipes and fittings for buried drainage and
sewerage systems - Specifications
ISO/TR 10358 : 93
Plastic
resistance classification table
pipes
and
fittings
Combined
chemical
ISO/TR 10465-1: 93
Underground Installation of flexible Glass-Reinforced
Thermosetting Resin (GRP) Pipes; Part 1
ISO 10802 : 92 Ductile iron pipelines - Hydrostatic testing after installation
ISO 10931-1 : 97
Plastics Piping Systems for Industrial applications - Poly
Vinylidene Fluoride (PVDF)
1 02 01 04
USA Standards
1 02 01 04 01

ASTM A 74 : 96
Fittings
Standard Specification for Cast
Iron Soil Pipe and
ASTM A 796 : 95 Standard Practice for Structural Design of Corrugated Steel

Pipe, Pipe-Arches, and Arches for Storm and Sanitary Sewers
and other Buried Applications
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
ASTM A 849 : 95
Standard Specification for Post-Applied
Pavings, and Linings for Corrugated Steel Sewer and Drainage Pipe
Coatings,
ASTM A 862 : 93
Standard Practice for Application of Bituminous (Asphalt)
Coatings to Corrugated Steel Sewer and Drainage Pipe
ASTM A 888 : 95
Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe
and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping
Applications
ASTM B 788M : 97
Standard
Practice
for
Installing
Corrugated Aluminum Culverts and Storm Sewer Pipe
Factory-Made
ASTM C 4 : 96 Standard Specification for Clay Drain Tile

ASTM C 12 : 95 Standard Practice for Installing Vitrified Clay Pipe Lines
ASTM C 14M : 95
Drain, and Culvert Pipe [Metric]
for Concrete Sewer, Storm
ASTM C 32 : 93 Standard Specification for Sewer and Manhole Brick (Made from
Clay or Shale)
ASTM C 76M : 96
Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert,
Storm, Drain, and Sewer Pipe [Metric]
ASTM C 118M : 95
Drainage [Metric]
Standard Specification for Concrete Pipe for Irrigation or
ASTM C 412M : 94
Standard Practice for Concrete Drain Tile [Metric]
ASTM C 425 : 96
Standard Specification for Compression Joints for
Vitrified Clay Pipe and Fittings
ASTM C 443M : 94
Standard Specification for Joints for Circular Concrete
Sewer and Culvert Pipe, Using Rubber Gaskets [Metric]
ASTM C 444M : 95
[Metric]
Standard Specification for Perforated Concrete Pipe
ASTM C 478M : 96
Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete
Manhole Sections [Metric]
ASTM C 564 : 95
Soil Pipe and Fittings
Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron
ASTM C 654M : 95
Standard Specification for Porous Concrete Pipe [Metric]
ASTM C 655M : 95
Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete D-Load
Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe [Metric]
ASTM C 700 : 96
Standard Specification for Vitrified Clay Pipe, Extra
Strength, Standard Strength, and Perforated
ASTM C 722 : 94
Monolithic Surfaces
Standard Specification for Chemical-Resistant Resin
ASTM C 822
: 93
Related Products
Standard Terminology Relating to Concrete Pipe and
ASTM C 828 : 89
Standard Test Method for Low-Pressure Air Test of
Vitrified Clay Pipe Lines
ASTM C 877M : 94
Standard Specification for External Sealing Bands for
Non-circular Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain, and Culvert Pipe [Metric]
ASTM C 1227 : 98
Standard Specification for Precast Septic Tanks
ASTM D 1785 : 96
Standard Specification for Poly (vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120
ASTM D 2235R : 96
3
Cement
for
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
ASTM D 2321R : 95
Standard Practice for Underground Installation of
Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications
ASTM D 2564 : 96
Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems
ASTM D 2661 : 96
Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-ButadieneStyrene (ABS) Schedule 40 Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings
ASTM D 2665 : 96
Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings
ASTM D 2729 : 96
Sewer Pipe and Fittings
ASTM D 2751 : 96
Styrene (ABS) Sewer Pipe and Fittings
for
ASTM D 2852 : 95
Standard Specification for Styrene-Rubber (SR) Plastic
Drain Pipe and Fittings
ASTM D 2855 : 96
Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints
with Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe and Fittings
ASTM D 2949 : 96
Standard Specification for 3.25-In. Outside Diameter
Class Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings
ASTM D 2996 : 95
Standard Specification for Filament-Wound Fiberglass
(Glass- fiber Reinforced Thermosetting Resin) Pipe
ASTM D 3034 : 96
Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly Vinyl Chloride
(PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings
ASTM D 3122 : 95
Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for StyreneRubber (SR) Plastic Pipe and Fittings
ASTM D 3212R : 96
Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer
Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals
ASTM D 3262 : 96
Standard Specification for Fiberglass (Glass-FiberReinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Sewer Pipe
ASTM D 3311 : 94
Standard Specification for Drain, Waste, and Vent
(DWV) Plastic Fittings Patterns
ASTM D 3839 : 96
Fiberglass (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe
ASTM D 5926 : 96
Gaskets for Drain, Waste, and Vent (DWV), Sewer, Sanitary, and Storm
Plumbing Systems
ASTM F 405 : 96
Tubing and Fittings
Standard Specification for Corrugated Polyethylene (PE)
ASTM F 412R : 94
Systems
Standard Terminology
Relating to Plastic Piping
ASTM F 438
: 96
Standard Specification for Socket-Type CPVC Plastic
Pipe Fittings Schedule 40
ASTM F 449
: 93
Standard Practice for Subsurface Installation of
Corrugated Thermoplastic Tubing for Agricultural Drainage or Water Table
Control
ASTM F 477 : 96
Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets)
for Jointing Plastic Pipe
ASTM F 481 : 94
Standard Practice for Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe
and Corrugated Tubing in Septic Tank Leach Fields
4
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
ASTM F 679 : 95
Large-Diameter Plastic Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings
ASTM F 758 : 95
Standard Specification for Smooth-Wall Poly Vinyl
Chloride (PVC) Plastic Under-drain Systems for Highway, Airport, and Similar
Drainage
ASTM F 789R : 95
Standard Specification for Type PS-46 and Type PS 115
Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Gravity Flow Sewer Pipe and Fittings
ASTM F 800 : 89
Chloride Tubing and Compatible Fittings
for
Corrugated
Poly
Vinyl
ASTM F 810
: 93
Standard Specification for Smooth-Wall Polyethylene
(PE) Pipe for Use in Drainage and Waste Disposal Absorption Fields
ASTM F 949 : 96
Standard Specification for Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC)
Corrugated Sewer Pipe With a Smooth Interior and Fittings
ASTM F 1412 : 96
Standard Specification for Polyolefin Pipe and Fittings
for Corrosive Waste Drainage Systems
ASTM F 1673 : 95
(PVDF) Corrosive Waste Drainage Systems
1 02 01 04 03
for
Polyvinylidene
Fluoride
American National Standard Institute (ANSI)

ANSI A 21.11 : 95
Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron Pressure Pipe and
Fittings (identical with C 111 of the American Water Works Association
1 02 01 05
European Standards
EN 124 : 94
Gully tops and manhole tops for vehicular and pedestrian areas
EN 295
Vitrified clay pipes and fittings and joints for drains and sewers
EN 295-1 : 91
Requirements
EN 295-2 : 91
Quality control and sampling
EN 295-3 : 91
Test methods
EN 295-4 : 95 Requirements for special fittings, adapters and compatible

accessories
EN 295-5 : 94
Requirements for perforated vitrified clay pipes and fittings
EN 295-6 : 95
Requirements for vitrified clay manholes
EN 295-7 : 95
Requirements for vitrified clay pipes and joints for pipe jacketing
EN 476 : 97
General requirements for components used in discharge pipes,
drains and sewers for gravity systems
EN 588
Fibre-cement pipes for sewers and drains
EN 588-1 : 96
Pipes, joints and fittings for gravity systems
EN 588-2 : 95
EN 598 : 94
Ductile iron pipes, fittings, accessories and their joints for
sewage applications. Requirements and test methods
EN 681
Elastomeric seals - Material requirements for pipe joint seals
used in water and drainage applications
EN 681-1 : 96
Vulcanized rubber
EN 752
Drain and sewer systems outside buildings
EN 752-1 : 95
Generalities and definitions
EN 752-2 : 96
Performance requirements
5
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
EN 752-3 : 96
Planning
EN 752-4 : 97
Hydraulic design and environmental considerations
EN 752-5 : 97
Rehabilitation
EN 752-6 : 98
Pumping installations
EN 752-7 : 98
Maintenance and operations
EN 1091 : 96
Vacuum sewerage systems outside buildings
EN 1401
Plastic piping systems for non-pressure underground drainage
and sewerage. Unplasticized poly(vinylchloride) (PVC-U)
EN 1401-1 : 98 Specifications for pipes, fittings and the system
EN 1610 : 97
Construction and testing of drains and sewers
EN 1671 : 97
Pressure sewerage systems outside buildings
EN 1917 : 95 Concrete Manholes and Inspection Chambers, unreinforced,

steel fibre and reinforced
EN 12729 : 97 Backflow Preventer with controllable Reduced Pressure Zone
1 02 01 06
British Standards
BS 534 : 90
sewage
Specification for steel pipes, joints and specials for water and
BS 882 : 92
Specification for aggregates from natural sources for concrete
BS 2494 : 90
Elastomeric Seals for Joints in Pipework and Pipelines
BS 4660 : 89
Replaced by EN 1401-1
BS 5480 : 90 Specification for glass reinforced (GRP) pipes, joints and

fittingsfor use for water supply or sewerage
BS 5911
Precast concrete pipes, fittings and ancillary products
BS 5911-2 :82 Specification for Inspection Chambers

BS 5911-100: 88 Specification for unreinforced and reinforced pipes and
fittingswith flexible joints
BS 5911-103 : 94 Specification for prestressed non-pressure pipes and fittings
with flexible joints
BS 5911-114 : 92 Specification for porous pipes
BS 5911-200 : 94 Specification for unreinforced and reinforced manholes and
soakaways of circular cross section
BS 6100
Glossary of terms
BS 6100-2/Sec. 2.5
Hydraulic engineering and construction work
BS 6100-2/Sec. 2.8
Pipelines and ducts
BS 6100-3/Sec. 3.3
Sanitation
BS 7158 : 89
Plastic Inspection Chambers
BS 8005-1 :
Replaced by BS-EN 752 -2 ff
BS 8010-2
Pipelines on land: design, construction and installation
BS 8010-2/2.1 : 87
Ductile Iron
BS 8010-2/2.5 : 89
Glass reinforced thermosetting plastics
BS 8010-2/2.7 : 89
Precast concrete
6
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
1 02 02
ODAC
Codes
Uniform Building Code (UBC) as issued by the International Conference of
Building Officials; Whittier, California; USA
Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC) as issued by the International Conference of
Building Officials; Whittier, California; USA
1 02 03
BS 8000-14 : 89
Code of practice for below ground drainage
BS 8010
Code of practice for pipelines
Other References
IAPMO International Association of Plumbing Officials and Mechanical Officials
2001 Walnut, California, United States
MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry
127 Park St NE, 22180 Vienna, VA, United States
BOCA International Private Sewage Disposal Code 1995
Building Officials & Code Administrators International;
4051Flossmmor Rd; 60478-5795 Country Club Hill, IL, United States
ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineers
NPC
National Plumbing Code; USA
1 03
Definitions
1 03 01
Technical Terms
Adaptor - special item made from the same material as the pipe or other suitable
material, to join together pipes and fittings of different jointing systems or to join
them to items of other pipeline systems
Bell - the flared-end portion of a pipe or fitting designed to function in the jointing
of other such pipe. (ASTM C 896)
Beveled pipe - a pipe with an end chamfered to mate or adjust to another
surface or to assist in assembly. (ASTM F 412)
Blinding - the placement of soil, bedding material over and on the sides of the
plastic tubing or envelope to ensure proper grade, alignment, support , and
protection of the tubing during backfilling and after installation
Compression joint - a joint designed so that a sealing action is obtained by
compression elastomeric components. (ASTM C 896)
Conduit - a pipe for conveying fluid
Cradle - a prefabricated rigid structure designed to provide trench bottom
support for the plastic tubing when soil support is inadequate (ASTM F 449)
Culvert - a pipeline intended to convey water under a highway, railroad, canal, or
similar facility (ASTM C 822)
Drain - pipeline, usually underground, designed to carry wastewater and /or
surface water from a source to a sewer (EN 752-1)
Dry well - dry chamber forming part of a pumping station and containing
pumping equipment, normally used in compliance with a wet well (EN 752-6)
Ductile iron - cast iron used for pipes, fittings and accessories in which graphite
is present substantially in spheroidal form
Elastomeric seal - a material or device that is elastomeric in nature and is used
to effect a seal between separable piping components (ASTM F 412)
7
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Encasement - special materials, their placement and configuration which are

designed to fully surround a pipe and develop a field supporting strength which
exceeds that of other commonly used installation and bedding techniques.
Envelope - porous material placed around the plastic tubing to provide bedding,
improve the flow of ground water and subsurface water into the drain, or function
as a filter (ASTM F 449)
Exfiltration - the quality of water leaving the test section during a specified time
period
Filter - an envelope of material or synthetic materials placed completely around
the drain to permit free water movement into the drain, provide stabilizing support
at the soil-filter interface, and restrict movement of silt and sand into the drain
Fittings - products such as wyes, tees, elbows, adapters, etc. Used in the
installation of pipelines. (ASTM C 896) or piping components used to join or
terminate sections of pipe or to provide changes of direction or branching in a
pipe system (ASTM F 412)
Flexible pipe - pipe, the load carrying capacity of which is limited by diametral
deformation under load to the ultimate design criteria without breaking or over
stressing (EN 476)
Flexible joint - joint, which permits significant angular deflection both during and
after installation and which, can accept a slight offset of the centerline.
Gasket - sealing component of a joint
Gully - an assembly to receive surface water for discharge into a drainage
system
Gully top - that part of a gully consisting of a frame and grating and/or cover
which is placed on the gully pot (body) at the place of installation (EN 124)
Grade rings - precast concrete rings used for vertical adjustment at the top of a
manhole to set manhole casting to proper grade (ASTM C 822)
Grating - the removable part(s) of a manhole top or gully top which covers a
manhole or gully opening (EN 124)
Gravity system - system where flow is caused by the force of gravity and where
the pipe normally operates partially full only. (EN 476)
Groundwater - water present in the sub-surface strata (EN 752-1)
Haunch - that portion of a pipe barrel extending from bottom to springline.
Haunching - the act of placing bedding material around the haunch of a pipe.
Hydrostatic test - a test of the ability of a pipe or its joints to withstand internal
hydrostatic pressure
Industrial waste - the water-conveyed residues resulting from manufacturing or
processing operations.
Infiltration - the quality of ground water entering the test section during a
specified time period (ASTM C 896)
Initial backfill - (1) layer of fill material immediately above the crown of the pipe.
Minimum thickness 300 mm unless otherwise indicated; (2) location for
placement of selected material , extending 300 mm from top of the bedding
material, applicable only in context with ASTM C 12
Inspection chamber - chamber with a removable cover constructed on a drain
or sewer that provides access from surface level only, but does not permit entry
of a person (EN 752-1)
Internal quality control - Contractors organizational structure, responsibilities,
procedures, processes and resources for implementing a quality management.
8
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Invert - lowest point of the internal surface of the barrel of a pipe or channel at
any cross section (EN 476)
Joint - connection between the adjacent ends of two pipes or components
including the means of sealing (EN 476)
Manhole - chamber with a removable cover constructed on a drain or sewer to
permit entry by personnel (EN 752-1)
Mitered pipe - see beveled pipe
Nominal size (DN) - a numerical designation of the size of a pipe, bend or
branch fitting, which is a convenient round number approximately equal to a
manufactured dimension
O-ring gasket - a solid gasket of circular cross section
Pipe barrel - cylindrical part of the pipe with a uniform cross section excluding
socket and spigot (EN 476)
Pipe bedding - the materials, their placement, consolidation and compaction , as
designed to support pipes laid in trenches below ground level (ASTM C 896)
Pipeline - assembly of pipes, fittings and joints between manholes or other
structures (EN 1610)
Push-on joint - a joint in which an elastomeric ring gasket is compressed in the
annular space between a bell end or socket and a spigot end of pipe.
Sometimes called a bell-and-spigot gasket joint (ASTM F 412)
Push-fit joint - see push-on joint
Rigid joint - a connection that is designed not to permit angular deflection or
axial movement in service
Rigid pipe - pipe, the load carrying capacity of which is limited by breaking or
overstressing, without significant deformation of its cross section
Rising main - pipe through which sewerage is pumped
SDR - standard dimension ratio: a numerical designation of a pipe series,
approximately equal to the dimension ratio of the nominal outside diameter and
the nominal wall thickness
Separate system - sewer system, normally of two pipelines, one carrying waste
water and the other surface water (EN 752-1)
Selected material - see satisfactory material Section 02200 Earthwork
Sewage - waste matter carried off by sewers (ASTM C 896)
Sewer - an underground pipe/conduit conveying waste material in a liquid
medium (ASTM C 896) or pipeline or other construction, usually underground,
designed to carry wastewater and /or surface water from more than one source
(EN 752-1)
Sewer system - network of pipelines and ancillary works which conveys
wastewater and /or surface water from drain to a treatment works or other place
of disposal
Sewerage - waste water and /or surface water conveyed by a drain or sewer (EN
752-1) or system for collection, treatment, and disposal of sewage from its point
of origin to a treatment place or another place of disposal (ASTM C 896)
Side fills - material between bedding and initial backfill
SN - nominal ring stiffness: a numerical designation of the ring stiffness of a pipe
or fitting, which is a convenient round number, relative to the determined
stiffness in kN/m2, indicating the minimum ring stiffness of a pipe or fitting
Socket - the portion of a pipe jointing system that is designed to accept and fit in
a plain-end pipe or a spigot-end pipe. (ASTM C 896)
9
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Solvent cement - an adhesive made by dissolving a plastic resin or compound

and a suitable solvent or mixture of solvents (ASTM F 412)
Spigot - that portion of a pipe jointing system that fits into the bell or socket of
the preceding pipe. (ASTM C 896)
Storm drain - a pipeline intended to convey stormwater (ASTM C 822)
Surcharge - condition in which wastewater and/or surface water is held under
pressure within a gravity drain or sewer system, but does not escape to the
surface to cause flooding (EN 752-1)
Surface water- rainwater, which has not seeped into the ground and which is
discharged to the drain or sewer system directly from the ground or from exterior
building roofs and surfaces (EN 752-2)
1 03 02
Abbreviations
DN
nominal size
gully
Q.C.
Quality Control
MH
manhole
sw
storm water
ww
waste water
1 04
System Description
1 04 02 01
General
Unless otherwise indicated, deliver and install the system, provide operational properties and, at any time,
comply with basic principles including but not limited to the following:
Extend underground sewers and drains to connect to building sewers and drains, public utility mains,
septic tank, or drain trench/drainage field, of sizes and locations indicated or appropriate. Install sewerage
and stormwater piping as separate system.
Ensure that lines, levels and structural conditions of all relevant existing sewers, drains, subsoil drains,
ditches and other structures will be preserved. Ensure that the impact of drain and sewer system on the
receiving waters shall meet the requirements of the relevant authority and the receiving waters will be
protected from pollution within the accepted limits.
Make sure that drains and sewers will be watertight in accordance with testing requirements and odour
nuisance and toxicity do not arise. Deliver and install all pipework in a way that it operates without
blocking. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at minimum slope of one (1) %.
Provide access to the system by means of manholes, inspection chambers and access fittings, where
practically, at every change of alignment or gradient, at the head of all sewers and drains, at every
junction of two or more pipelines, wherever there is a change in size and, in addition, at reasonable
intervals for inspection and maintenance. Provide and install proper sized increasers, reducers, and
couplings where different sizes or material of pipes and fittings are connected. Reduction of the size of
piping in the direction of flow is prohibited. For gravity systems, ensure that drains and sewers will be
sufficiently ventilated to the atmosphere by allowing free passage of air through the system.
1 04 02 02
Pumping of Sewage in a Gravity System and in a System Under Pressure
Unless otherwise indicated, install-pumping installations in compliance with but not limited to the following
basic principles:
Establish maximum and minimum predicted flow rate to determine the duty points of the pump(s) and the
size of mechanical and electrical equipment, which is necessary. The hydraulic design of the rising main
and the pumping equipment shall be considered together. Acceptable methods for calculation of head
losses and flows in pipes shall be approved by the Engineer.
Flushing and rodding connections shall be incorporated in the rising main where required. The diameter
of the rising main(s) shall be determined by considering design flow rates and associated velocities,
minimum velocities to limit sedimentation and minimum diameter to limit clogging
Pipelines shall be designed and installed for pressure resulting from maximum flow, no flow and transient
pressures (positive or negative), also taking account of external loads. In the case of transient conditions,
10
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
the amplitude and frequency shall be determined. Surge analysis shall be carried out taking into account
all possible operation conditions. The method of analysis shall be approved by the Engineer.
Thrust forces occurring at valves, changes in direction and diameter, branches and pipe ends, shall be
contained. Possible methods and provisions include restrained joints over an adequate length of pipeline,
thrust or anchor blocks and cradles and clamps, generally for non-buried pipelines. Anchorages shall be
installed to avoid transmitting vibration. Discharge points shall be installed to minimize splashing and
noise. Manholes into which rising mains discharge shall be well ventilated. Septicity shall be kept to a
minimum.
1 05
Submittals
In compliance with Conditions of Contract and provisions of Section 01300, the following shall be
submitted thirty (30) days before sewerage and drainage works are scheduled to commence:
1 05 01
Product Data
furnished and installed, include manufacturers certification showing compliance with requirements.
Manufacturers operating and maintenance requirements as applicable.
1 05 02
Shop Drawings
Shop drawings for manholes, septic tank(s), pump station if any, sump pits, inspection chambers,
seepage tanks, seepage fields, etc.
Longitudinal section profile drawings showing pipe sizes and manholes, locations, elevations, and other
piping in the same trench, including details of underground structures and connections.
1 05 03
Samples
Accompanying the above submittal, the Contractor shall submit samples of each item of adequate size
and construction.
1 05 04
Documented experience of Contractors site supervisor.

Records and reports of Contractors Internal Q.C
Records and reports of Contractors field Q.C
1 06
Quality Assurance
and records shall be established and maintained in a manner to ensure traceability.
Arrangements shall be made in Contractors work schedule and time allowed for checking and testing as
indicated.
1 06 01
Qualifications
documented experience in works related to sewerage, stormwater, and subsoil drainage and shall have
successfully completed works similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for the project.
Installers shall be familiar with the material and installation procedures indicated and shall be skilled and
trained.
1 06 02
Regulatory Requirements
Comply with all aspects of requirements of local authorities.
1 06 04
Quality Control
1 06 04 01
11
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Checking of suppliers test certificates and certificates of compliance to conform to

Specification and referenced Standards prior to first delivery.
Checking of suppliers delivery tickets of each delivery for completeness and
compliance with supply order and specification.
Checking of labels and the condition of pipes and components of each delivery,
particular to ensure that:
- pipes and components are undamaged
- protective coatings of pipes and fittings are undamaged
- where pipes are provided with factory applied jointing material, jointing material
is in proper condition.
- jointing components and containers of lubricants are undamaged, not
deteriorated, and labeled service life is still valid.
Checking if equipment and tools are in a serviceable condition at least every week
Checking of the correct storage of pipes, accessories and components every week.
Field Quality Control as indicated
1 07
Delivery, Storage and Handling
1 07 01
At all times material shall be handled with care to avoid damage.

Moving pipes and materials shall be held to a minimum to reduce the possibility of damage. Whether
moved by hands, hoists, or other acceptable method, material shall not be thrown, dropped, dragged,
bumped, or allowed to impact on objects that cause damage. Except for concrete pipes, the
recommended way of transporting and unloading of pipes is in package units using mechanical
equipment.
1 07 02
Pipe package units shall be stored and placed on level ground, stacked not more than one unit high.
Package units on the ground shall be protected by appropriate pieces of timber. When unloading
individual pipes, the pipes shall be placed on wooden supports, placed about one-fifth of the length of the
pipe from each end.
Where individual pipes are to be stacked, they shall be arranged, so that the sockets and spigots are not
loaded and excessive loads are not carried by pipes lower in the stack. Rubber gaskets and similar
material shall be stored in their original containers and kept away from oil, grease, direct sunlight, sources
of ozone such as fluorescent light and electric motors, excessive heat and areas where temperatures
exceed 60 deg. C. PVC pipes and similar material shall be kept away from direct sunlight .
1 08
Project and Site Conditions
1 08 01
Existing Conditions
Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of uncharted utility lines or
other facilities. Repair any damage to existing utility lines or other facilities and pay all associated costs.
1 08 02
Comply with any applicable portion of local environmental regulations pertaining to sanitary sewerage and
drainage.
12
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Part 2: Products
Unless otherwise indicated or approved by the Engineer, material and components for like functions shall
be used continuously through the entire Section with all parts for assembly and installation, from the
same source, same manufacturer, or as recommended by the manufacturer. All pipe, pipe fitting material
and components shall be compatible with each other and shall be designed and manufactured for the
intended use, nature of fluid, pressure, load, and temperature.
Fittings shall be molded or formed to correspond in all respects with the properties of the pipe of the
corresponding size; in required tee, bends, elbows, clean-outs, reducers, traps and other configurations
required.
2 01
Sanitary Sewerage (Gravity System)
2 01 01
Pipe and Fittings
2 01 01 02
Vitrified clay pipe, spigot and socket type, pipe diameter(s) as indicated, shall comply with one of the
following standards:
01.0
236; EN 295; ASTM C 700,
01.1
ordinary strength / class B, 236 or equivalent.
01.2
high strength / class A, 236 or equivalent.
01.3
Jointing: rubber or plastic gasket for push-in joints shall comply with one
of the Standards: ASTM C 425; EN 295-4; or equivalent.
When connecting two spigot ends, coupling shall be made of a rubber or elastomeric sealing sleeve with
approved stainless steel clamp ring assembly.
2 01 01 03
Concrete Pipe and Fittings
2 01 01 03 01
Non-reinforced Concrete Pipe
Non-reinforced concrete pipe shall comply with the standard(s) indicated:

01.0
ASTM C 14M, spigot and socket type, pipe diameter(s) as indicated,

01.1
Class 1, wall thickness and minimum strength depending on pipe
diameter.
01.2
diameter.
01.3
diameter.
01.4
Jointing: rubber compression gasket according to ASTM C 443.
02.0
BS 5911-100, spigot and socket type or for rebated joints, type of
cement, use of blast furnace slag, fuel-ash and admixtures as approved by the
Engineer, pipe diameter(s) as indicated,
02.1
class L (light).
02.2
class M (medium).
02.3
class H (heavy).
02.4
Jointing: elastomeric gasket type D (rolling or sliding ring)
according to BS 2494.
2 01 01 03 02
Reinforced Concrete Pipe
Reinforced Concrete Pipe, spigot and socket type, shall comply with the standard(s) indicated:
01.0
ASTM C 76M, pipe diameter(s) as indicated,

13
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
01.1 class I, minimum concrete strength 27,6 or 34,5 MPa, depending on

pipe diameter, wall thickness as indicated.
01.2
class II, minimum concrete strength 27,6 or 34,5 MPa,
depending on pipe diameter, wall thickness as indicated.
01.3
class III, minimum concrete strength 27,6 or 34,5 MPa,
01.4
class IV, minimum concrete strength 27,6 or 34,5 MPa,
01.5
class V, minimum concrete strength 41.4 MPa, wall thickness as
indicated.
01.6
02.0 BS 5911-100, spigot and socket type or for rebated joints, type of
02.1
Class L (light).
02.2
Class M (medium).
02.3
Class H (heavy).
02.4
2 01 01 04
Cast Iron Pipes and Fittings
2 01 01 04 01
Cast Iron Pipe
Cast-iron soil pipe, shall comply with standard(s) indicated:

01.0 spigot and socket type, ASTM A 74, pipe diameter(s) as indicated,
01.1
Class: Extra Heavy.
01.2
Class: Service.
01.3
Jointing: rubber compression gasket according to ASTM C 564
02.0
882, hubless type, coated, for coupling joints, pipe diameter(s) as
indicated.
02.1
Couplings: rubber or elastomeric sealing sleeve with approved
stainless steel clamp ring assembly .
2 01 01 04 02
Ductile Cast Iron Pipe
Ductile cast-iron pipe, for push-on flexible joints, shall comply with standard(s) indicated:
01.0
ASTM A 746, with external asphaltic coating and internal cement mortar
lining of type as approved by the Engineer, pipe wall thickness depending on
installation conditions (Type 1 to 5), pipe diameter(s) as indicated.
01.1
Jointing: rubber gasket joint according to ANSI C 111/A 21.11 or
equivalent.
02.0
EN 598, spigot and socket type, with external zinc coating and finishing
layer compatible with zinc, internal lining of high-alumina cement mortar, and an
epoxy-based coating of the end surfaces which can come in contact with the
sewerage effluents, pipe diameter(s) as indicated.
When agreed by the Engineer, external coating may be alternatively made of
extruded polyethylene, extruded propylene, polyurethane, or fiber cement mortar.
Internal lining may be alternatively made of blast furnace cement mortar,
polyurethane, polyethylene or epoxy resin.
14
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
02.1
Jointing: flexible rubber gasket according to ISO 4633 or
equivalent.
2 01 01 05
Plastic Pipe and Fittings
2 01 01 05 01
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) pipe shall comply with standard(s) indicated:

01.0
SSA 14, made of uPVC, spigot and socket type, pipe diameter(s) as
indicated.
01.1
Class 2.
01.2
Class 3.
01.3
Jointing: elastomeric gasket.
02.0
ISO 4435, made of uPVC, spigot and socket type, for buried (UD)
application, pipe diameter as indicated.
02.1
Jointing: elastomeric sealing ring according to ISO 4633 or
equivalent.
03.0
EN 1401-1, made of uPVC, spigot and socket type, for buried (UD)
application, pipe diameter(s) as indicated,
03.1
wall thickness SDR 34 (SN 8).
03.2
03.3
03.4
Jointing: elastomeric O-ring seal according to EN 681.
03.5
Jointing: solvent cement as recommended by the pipe
manufacturer.
04.0
ASTM D 2729, spigot and socket type, pipe diameter(s) as indicated.

04.1
05.0
Jointing: solvent cement in compliance with ASTM D 2564.
ASTM D 3034 (PSM), spigot and socket type, pipe diameter(s) as

indicated,
05.1
minimum wall thickness SDR 23,5.
05.2
minimum wall thickness SDR 26.
05.3
05.4
05.5
Jointing: elastomeric gasket according to ASTM D 3212.
05.6
Jointing: elastomeric seal or gasket according to ASTM F 477.
05.7
Jointing: solvent cement in compliance with ASTM D 2564 and
ASTM D 2855.
06.0
ASTM F 679, spigot and socket type, pipe diameter(s) as indicated,

06.1 minimum cell classification T-1.
2 01 01 05 03
06.2
minimum cell classification T-2.
06.3
Jointing: integral elastomeric seal according to ASTM F 477.
Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Pipe
ABS (Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene) sewer pipe and fittings shall comply with Standard(s) indicated:
01.0
ASTM D 2751, spigot and socket type, pipe diameter(s) as indicated,

01.1
Wall thickness SDR 23,5.

15
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
2 01 01 06
ODAC
01.2
Wall thickness SDR 35.
01.3
Wall thickness SDR 42.
01.4
Jointing: solvent cement according to ASTM D 2235.
01.5
Jointing: elastomeric gasket according to ASTM F 477.
Glass Fibre Reinforced Plastic (GRP) Pipes and Fittings
Glass-fiber reinforced plastic pipes, spigot and socket type, shall comply with the standard(s) indicated:
01.0
02.0
ASTM D 3263, pipe diameter(s) as indicated,

01.1
type 1 (RPMP polyester)
01.2
type 2 (RTRP polyester)
01.3
type 3 (RPMP epoxy)
01.4
type 4 (RTRP epoxy)
01.5
477.
Jointing: elastomeric seal or gasket in compliance with ASTM F
BS 5480, type G (gravity), max. internal hydrostatic pressure < 0,5 bar,
for flexible joints, pipe diameter(s) as indicated.
02.1
2 01 02
Jointing: elastomeric sealing ring according to BS 2494.
Granular pipe bedding material includes single-size granular material, graded granular material, sand, allin aggregates, and crushed aggregates.
Granular material shall be in accordance with BS 882 or an equivalent standard.
The grading shall conform to the overall limits given in Table 2-4 / Annex 6
2 01 03
Accessories
2 01 03 01
Manholes
2 01 03 01 01
Construction
01.0

equivalent, designed and formed with male and female ends, with
provision for rubber gasket joints, minimum compressive strength 27,5
MPa (4000 psi), manhole top (concentric cone, eccentric cone or flat slab
top) as indicated, top of cone to match grade rings, resilient connectors
between manhole, pipes and laterals.
01.1
01.2
02.0

manhole design as shown on drawings or otherwise indicated, minimum
concrete compressive strength 27,5 MPa, watertight.
03.0
Concrete brick/block units, modular size, minimum average compressive

strength 24,1 MPa (3500 psi) unless otherwise indicated, manhole
design as shown on drawings or otherwise indicated.
Clay manhole brick units, modular size, manhole design as shown on drawings or otherwise indicated,
minimum average compressive strength 21 MPa (3000 psi) unless otherwise indicated.
16
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
2 01 03 01 02
2 01 03 01 03
ODAC

01.0

cover including frame, in compliance with 413, live load rating and
nominal sizes as indicated.
02.0

cover including frame, boltable unless otherwise indicated, minimum
tensile strength 207 MPa (min. class 30 B ASTM A 48), with 100 mm
minimum width flange, size, and closed surface or open checkerboard
grille as indicated.
03.0

surface, removable cover, boltable unless otherwise indicated, vented,
minimum vent area > 5% of the clear opening up to 600 mm clear
opening and >140 cm2 for clear openings > 600 mm, nominal size as
indicated,
03.1
class A 15 (test load 15 KN) where indicated.
03.2
class B 125 (test load 125 KN) where indicated.
03.3
class C 250 (test load 250 KN) where indicated.
03.4
class D 400 (test load 400 KN) where indicated.
03.5
class E 600 (test load 600 KN) where indicated.
03.6
class F 900 (test load 900 KN) where indicated.
Manhole Steps
Shall be made of cast iron, epoxy coated, non-slip finishing, designed to support a concentrated load of
227 kg, at 300 mm intervals. Minimum treads length 300 mm, minimum tread width 25 mm .
2 01 03 02
Inspection Chamber
Shall be made of cast-iron unless otherwise indicated. Plastic inspection chambers shall comply with BS
7158 or equivalent. Inspection chambers made of GRC shall comply with EN 588-2 or equivalent.
Concrete inspection chambers shall comply with EN 1917 or equivalent.
2 01 03 03
Components for Pumping of Sewage in a Gravity System
2 01 03 03 01
Pumps
Each pump and its drive unit shall be suitable for the nature and composition of sewage to be pumped
and for the throughout the specified range of pumping requirements such as flow rates, heads, duty
points.
2 01 03 03 02
Prime Movers and Drives
Prime movers and drives shall be electrical type unless otherwise indicated and shall be suitable for the
type of pump specified or selected and rated for all operational conditions. Where electric motors are to
be in contact with potentially explosive atmospheres, they shall be explosion proof. Type of drive may be
direct, geared, belt, close coupled, intermediate shafting as indicated and/or approved by the Engineer.
Vibration shall be kept at a minimum.
2 01 03 03 03
Valves
All valves shall be suitable for use of wastewater indicated or expected for the Project and shall be
identified by suitable tags.
Valves of following types shall be used where indicated or appropriate and approved by the Engineer:
- Isolating valve, to allow sections of pipework, pumps, valves etc. to be removed
without emptying the whole raising main.
- Washout valve at low or intermediate points to allow sections of the rising main
to be emptied.
17
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
- Non-return valve at pumps to prevent backflow from the rising main.

- Air valves at summits and other points indicated by a surge analysis. When a
single valve is used, it shall be double acting.
When fully open, valves shall not disturb the flow distribution.
To minimize surge pressure in the rising main, all valves on rising main shall be arranged to close before
pumps are stopped, and to open after they have reached full speed, both at controlled rates. Pressure
expansion vessels/tanks and/or water hammer arrestors shall be provided where necessary.
2 01 03 03 04
Controls and Electrical Equipment
All electrical installations shall be in compliance with requirements specified in applicable Sections of
Division 16: Electrical
Switchboards and motor controls shall be of modular construction. Each circuit shall be totally
segregated. Each pump set shall be provided with a separate starter.
Safeguards shall be incorporated in pump controls to stop units in the event of loss of suction pressure or
unacceptable flow conditions. The control system shall ensure that unnecessary repeated stopping and
starting or speed changes are avoided.
A separate connection point for a temporary power generator, with switching arrangements, shall be
provided unless otherwise indicated.
2 01 03 03 05
Instrumentation
Instrumentation shall be provided where indicated or appropriate and approved by the Engineer as
follows:
- monitoring equipment (e.g. level, flow, pressure speed, voltage, power factor,
hours run etc.)
- indication of operation of duty/standby pumps
2 01 03 03 06
Alarms
When alarm system is indicated, it shall have an emergency power source capable of operating for at
least 24 hours in the event of failure of the main power supply. The alarm system shall include where
indicated: flammable gas, fire, high water level, bearing temperature, motor temperature, pump failure,
and power failure.
2 01 04
Sanitary Sewerage Collecting Tank
2 01 04 01
Tanks shall be designed and manufactured so that they will not collapse or rupture when subjected to
earth and hydrostatic pressures when the tanks are full or empty. Size, placement, and number of
openings shall be taken into consideration. Unless heavier loads are expected, the minimum live load
considered at any part of the tank surface shall be 14 kPa. If lifting points are to be provided, they shall be
considered in the design and manufacturing of the structure. Unless an individual tank design requires
otherwise, the following principles shall be taken into consideration:
The septic tank system shall include at least two compartments and a distribution chamber. The first
compartment shall have a liquid volume of approximately two thirds of the liquid volume of the entire
content of the system. No baffle, tee, outlet filter unit, or compartment wall shall extend to the interior roof
without providing for venting. The cross-sectional area of a vent shall be at least equivalent to a DN 100
pipe diameter. The influent pipe shall be not less than DN 100 mm. The difference between the invert of
the influent pipe and the invert of the effluent pipe shall be a minimum of 50 mm and a maximum of 100
mm. Inlet and outlet pipes shall be connected to the tank with a sealed flexible joint to accommodate tank
movement. A baffle or tee shall be placed at the influent pipe. An outlet baffle or tee equipped with a solid
deflection device or an outlet filter device shall be placed at the effluent pipe. All accessories shall be
made of non-corrosive materials and shall be permanently connected with non-corrosive fasteners or
fittings to the inside of the tank or inlet/outlet piping. Inlet baffles or tees shall extend at least 200 mm
below the water line and at least 125 mm above the water line. The outlet device shall extend below the
water line at least 250 mm but not lower than 40% of the tank total liquid depth. It shall extend 125 above
liquid level. A solid deflector or outlet filter device shall be provided for the purpose of preventing
18
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
suspended solids greater than 2.4 mm being discharged from the tank. All requirements given are for
normal, low-flow conditions unless otherwise indicated. An access opening shall be located over the
influent baffle and the effluent baffle. It shall be provided with a lock system to prevent unauthorized
entrance. An access opening shall be provided to permit pumping of all compartments. An inspection
hole, 100 mm in diameter, shall be located over an interior divider in a two-compartment tank.
2 01 04 02
Concrete Construction
01.0
Reinforced precast concrete construction, waterproof, surface finishes as
indicated, minimum concrete compressive strength 28 MPa (4000 psi). The
concrete cover for reinforcing bars, mats or fabric shall be not less than 25 mm,
01.1
Two-chamber system,
01.2
Three-chamber system,
01.3
Tank designs, capacity, concrete quality, internal and external
waterproofing, etc. as shown on the drawings or otherwise indicated.
02.0
Reinforced insitu-concrete construction, waterproof, surface finishes as
indicated, minimum concrete compressive strength 28 MPa (4000 psi). The
concrete cover for reinforcing bars, mats of fabric shall be not less than 25 mm,
02.1
tank designs, capacity, concrete quality, internal and external
waterproofing, etc. as shown on the drawings or otherwise indicated.
03.0
Distribution chamber, made of reinforced concrete, waterproof, with
single inlet, two outlets, gate removable cover with lift ring unless otherwise
indicated.
2 01 05
Water Treatment
Treated wastewater may be used as irrigation water supply and water for W/C flushing devices
To be specified by the Project Specifier! Information may be gathered from BS 6297 or similar sources
2 02
Storm water Drainage (Gravity System)
2 02 01
Pipe and Fittings
2 02 01 01
Steel Pipe and Fittings

In general steel pipes should not be used as buried underground piping
2 02 01 02
Vitrified clay pipe, spigot and socket type, pipe diameter(s) as indicated, shall comply with the Standards:
EN 295; ASTM C 700,
Jointing: rubber or plastic gasket for push-in joints shall comply with one of the Standards: ASTM C 425;
EN 295-4; or equivalent.
When connecting two spigot ends, coupling shall be made of a rubber or elastomeric sealing sleeve with
approved stainless steel clamp ring assembly.
2 02 01 03
2 02 01 03 01
Non-reinforced Concrete Pipe
Non-reinforced concrete pipe, shall comply with the standard(s) indicated:

01.0
ASTM C 14M, spigot and socket type, pipe diameter(s) as indicated,

01.1
class 1, wall thickness and minimum strength depending on pipe
diameter.
01.2
diameter.
19
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
01.3
diameter.
01.4
02.0
02.1
Class L (light).
02.2
Class M (medium).
02.3
Class H (heavy).
02.4
2 02 01 03 02
Reinforced Concrete Pipe
Reinforced Concrete Pipe, spigot and socket type, shall comply with the standard(s) indicated:
01.0
ASTM C 76M, pipe diameter(s) as indicated,

01.1 class I, minimum concrete strength 27,6 or 34,5 MPa, depending on
pipe diameter, wall thickness as indicated.
01.2
class II, minimum concrete strength 27,6 or 34,5 MPa,
01.3
class III, minimum concrete strength 27,6 or 34,5 MPa,
01.4
class IV, minimum concrete strength 27,6 or 34,5 MPa,
01.5
class V, minimum concrete strength 41.4 MPa, wall thickness as
indicated.
01.6
02.0
02.1
class L (light).
02.2
class M (medium).
02.3
class H (heavy).
02.4
2 02 01 04
Cast Iron Pipes and Fittings
2 02 01 04 01
Cast Iron Pipe
Cast-iron soil pipe, shall comply with standard(s) indicated:

01.0 spigot and socket type, ASTM A 74, pipe diameter(s) as indicated,
01.1
class: Extra Heavy.
01.2
class: Service.
01.3
Jointing: rubber compression gasket according to ASTM C 564
02.0
Hubless type, coated, for coupling joints, pipe diameter(s) as
indicated.
02.1
Couplings: rubber or elastomeric sealing sleeve with approved
stainless steel clamp ring assembly .
20
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
2 02 01 05
2 02 01 05 01
Plasticized Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe shall comply with standard(s) indicated:

01.0
made of uPVC, spigot and socket type, pipe diameter(s) as indicated,

01.1
Class 2.
01.2
Class 3.
01.3
Jointing: elastomeric gasket.
02.0
ISO 4435, made of uPVC, spigot and socket type, for UD application,
02.1
Jointing: elastomeric sealing ring according to ISO 4633 or
equivalent.
03.0
EN 1401-1, made of uPVC, spigot and socket type, for buried (UD)
application, pipe diameter(s) as indicated,
03.1
03.2
03.3
03.4
Jointing: elastomeric O-ring seal according to EN 681.
03.5
Jointing: solvent cement as recommended by the pipe
manufacturer.
04.0
ASTM D 2729, spigot and socket type, pipe diameter(s) as indicated.

04.1
Jointing: solvent cement in compliance with ASTM D 2564.
05.0
ASTM D 3034 (PSM), spigot and socket type, pipe diameter(s) as
indicated,
05.1
minimum wall thickness SDR 23,5.
05.2
05.3
05.4
05.5
Jointing: elastomeric gasket according to ASTM D 3212.
05.6
Jointing: elastomeric seal or gasket according to ASTM F 477.
05.7
Jointing: solvent cement in compliance with ASTM D 2564 and
ASTM D 2855.
06.0
ASTM F 679, spigot and socket type, pipe diameter(s) as indicated,

06.1 minimum cell classification T-1.
2 02 01 05 03
06.2
minimum cell classification T-2.
06.3
Jointing: integral elastomeric seal according to ASTM F 477.
Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Pipe
ABS (Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene) sewer pipe and fittings shall comply with Standard(s) indicated:
01.0
ASTM D 2751, spigot and socket type, pipe diameter(s) as indicated,

01.1
wall thickness SDR 23,5.
01.2
wall thickness SDR 35.
01.3
wall thickness SDR 42.

21
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
2 02 01 06
ODAC
01.4
Jointing: solvent cement according to ASTM D 2235.
01.5
Jointing: elastomeric gasket according to ASTM F 477.
Glass Fibre Reinforced Plastic (GRP) Pipes and Fittings
Glass-fiber reinforced plastic pipes, spigot and socket type, shall comply with the standard(s) indicated:
01.0
ASTM D 3263, pipe diameter(s) as indicated,

01.1
type 1 (RPMP polyester)
01.2
type 2 (RTRP polyester)
01.3
type 3 (RPMP epoxy)
01.4
type 4 (RTRP epoxy)
01.5
477.
Jointing: elastomeric seal or gasket in compliance with ASTM F
02.0
BS 5480, type G (gravity), max. internal pressure < 0,5 bar, for flexible
joints, pipe diameter(s) as indicated.
02.1
2 02 02
Jointing: elastomeric sealing ring according to BS 2494.
Granular material shall be in accordance with BS 882 or an equivalent standard.
The grading shall conform to the overall limits given in Table 2-4 / Annex 6.
2 02 03
Accessories
2 02 03 01
Manhole
2 02 03 01 01
Construction
01.0
equivalent, designed and formed with male and female ends, with provision for
rubber gasket joints, minimum compressive strength 27,5 MPa (4000 psi),
manhole top (concentric cone, eccentric cone or flat slab top) as indicated, top of
cone to match grade rings, resilient connectors between manhole, pipes and
laterals.
01.1
01.2
02.0
manhole design as shown on drawings or otherwise indicated, minimum concrete
compressive strength 27,5 MPa (4000 psi)
03.0
Concrete brick/block units, modular size, minimum average compressive
strength 24,1 MPa (3500 psi) unless otherwise indicated, manhole design as
shown on drawings or otherwise indicated.
04.0
Clay manhole brick units, modular size, manhole design as shown on
drawings or otherwise indicated, minimum average compressive strength 21 MPa
(3000 psi) unless otherwise indicated.
2 02 03 01 02

01.0
cover, in compliance with 413, live load rating and nominal sizes as indicated.
22
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
02.0
cover, boltable unless otherwise indicated, minimum tensile strength 207 MPa
(min. class 30 B ASTM A 48), with 100 mm minimum width flange, closed surface
or open checkerboard grille as indicated.
03.0
surface, removable cover, boltable unless otherwise indicated, vented, minimum
vent area > 5% up to 600 mm clear opening and >140 cm2 for clear openings >
600 mm, nominal sizes as indicated,
2 02 03 01 03
03.1
03.2
03.3
class C 250 (test load 250 KN) where indicated.
03.4
03.5
class E 600 (test load 600 KN) where indicated.
03.6
Manhole Steps
Shall be made of cast iron, epoxy coated, and non-slip finishing, designed to support a concentrated load
of 227 kg, at 300 mm intervals unless otherwise indicated. Minimum treads length 300 mm, minimum
tread width 25 mm unless otherwise indicated.
2 02 03 03
Inspection Chambers
Shall be made of cast-iron unless otherwise indicated. Plastic inspection chambers shall comply with BS
7158; inspection chambers made of GRC shall comply with EN 588-2; concrete inspection chambers
shall comply with EN 1917.
2 02 03 04
Yard Drain (Gully)

01.0
made of cast iron or cast steel unless otherwise indicated, including
removable grating and corrosion protected dirt bucket, in compliance with EN 124
or an equivalent standard, nominal size as indicated,
01.1
01.2
01.3 class C 250 (test load 250 KN) where indicated.

01.4
01.5 class E 600 (test load 600 KN) where indicated.

01.6
2 02 05
Soakaway Pits
Soakaway pits shall not be installed less than 5 m from any concrete foundation to avoid settlement
2 03
Subsoil Drainage
2 03 01
Pipe and Fittings
2 03 01 01
Clay Pipe and Fittings
Clay pipe shall be made of burned clay, shale, fire clay or a mixture thereof, pipe diameter(s) as
indicated.
Clay pipes shall comply with standard(s) indicated:
01.0
ASTM C 4, water absorption in compliance with class requirements, buttended, with smooth inside,
01.1
Class: Standard drain tile.

23
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
2 03 01 02
ODAC
01.2
Class: Extra-quality drain tile.
01.3
Class: Heavy-duty drain tile.
01.4
Jointing: butt jointed.
Concrete drainage pipes shall comply with standard(s) indicated:

01.0
BS 5911-114 porous precast concrete pipe, with rebated joints, with nonporous invert extruded for the full length of the pipe and to a height up to the pipe
equal to not less than one-third of the internal diameter, pipe diameter(s) as
indicated.
01.1
Class 1 (min. crushing load 20 KN/m).
01.2
Class 2 (min. crushing load 23-30 KN/m, depending on pipe
diameter).
2 03 01 03
Perforation slots shall be uniformly spaced along the length of the pipe. Dimensions and spacing of slots
shall be as indicated in the Standard.
01.0
Corrugated Polyethylene (PE) Tubing ASTM F 405, perforated, pipe
diameter(s) as indicated.
02.0
Jointing: Snap-on, screw-on, or wrap around as recommended by the
tubing manufacturer and approved by the Engineer.
03.0
Corrugated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) Tubing ASTM F 800, perforated, pipe
diameter(s) as indicated.
04.0
Jointing: Snap-on, screw-on, or wrap-around as recommended by the
tubing manufacturer and approved by the Engineer.
05.0
Corrugated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) pipes ASTM F 949, perforated,
pipe diameter(s) as indicated.
06.0
Jointing: elastomeric seal according to ASTM F 477.
2 03 02
Accessories
2 03 02 01
Joint Cover
Shall be asphalt-saturated roofing felt or polyethylene as approved by the Engineer.
2 03 02 02
Filter Material
Filter material to be used shall restrict fine particles of silt and sand from entering the drain.
Filter material shall be a suitable well-graded sand-gravel mixture, or non-biodegradability black polyolefin
or polyester, nylon fabric or other material approved by the Engineer.
24
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Part 3: Execution
3 01
General Examination
Immediately before laying, examine accessories, each pipe and joint again for soundness and cleanliness
and make sure that material and surfaces, which form part of a joint, are clean and dry before
commencing their assembly. All defective material shall be replaced. Check that the position and levels of
existing drains and services have been established. Check that trench lines do not encroach on routes of
other services and obstructions. Investigate if there is a risk of unplanned extraneous water entering
drains and sewers and investigate to determine the extent of this risk and provide adequate protection.
3 02
General Preparation
Provide and fix clear, stable markers and reference points for lines and levels. Hand trim excavations to
required elevations. Establish the center line and width of trenches and locate manholes, inspection
chambers, etc. and ensure that proper branch drain alignments can be achieved.
3 03
Installation
3 03 01
General
Installation of piping systems shall begin at the low point of the system, true to grades and alignment
indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Bell ends/sockets of piping shall be faced upstream. Gaskets,
seals, sleeves, couplings etc. shall be installed in accordance with manufacturers recommendations for
use of lubricants, solvent cements, glue, etc. and other installation requirements.
Where pipes are generally provided with flexible joints, locate joint positions as closely as practicable to
the external faces of structures, manholes, inspection chambers and the like, through which the pipes are
laid. Where pipes are generally laid with rigid joints and there is no specified provision for flexible joints at
the above positions, get instructions of the Engineer, if it is required that such provisions are necessary.
loading indicated and expected. During installation work, excavations shall be kept free from water, e.g.
rainwater, seepage water, spring water or water from leaks from pipelines. Methods of dewatering shall
not affect embedments and pipelines. Precautions shall be taken to prevent loss of fine bedding and filling
material. On completion of dewatering, any temporary drains shall be adequately sealed.
3 03 03
Bedding and Laying of Stormwater and Sanitary Sewerage Pipes
3 03 03 01
General
Unless the design permits and the Engineer approves and the nature of the ground is such as to allow it
to be trimmed to formation, pipes shall be laid on a granular piping bed as indicated.
Granular Bedding:
A shallow depression shall be formed by the barrel of the pipe as it is laid. Provide socket holes at each
joint position. Ensure that these are deep enough to prevent the weight of the pipe and the load upon it
bearing on the socket or coupling, while leaving the specified depth of bedding beneath the joint.
The width of the bedding shall be the width of the trench unless otherwise indicated.
The thickness of the granular bedding layer, measured under the pipe barrel, shall not be less than:
- 100 mm in normal soil conditions
- 150 mm in rock or hard soil conditions
Where the trench bottom has little bearing strength to support the pipe bedding material, special
construction measures will be necessary. These measures include replacement of soil with other
materials, e.g. sand, gravel or concrete. Concrete includes lightweight concrete, lean concrete,
unreinforced concrete, reinforced concrete, and soil cement. The special measures of bedding shall only
be used if their suitability has been confirmed by structural design calculations established by the
Contractor and approved by the Engineer. The placement of side fill and backfill shall only be
commenced when the pipe joints and the bedding are in a condition to permit loading. Side fill shall be
granular bedding material or-when approved by the Engineer- selected material as specified in Section
02200 Earthwork.
25
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Minimum thickness of the initial backfill shall be 300 mm above the pipe barrel unless otherwise indicated
and shall be selected material as specified in Section 02200 Earthwork. The initial backfill shall be
carefully compacted. The degree of compaction shall be verified by testing approved by the Engineer.
The choice of compaction equipment, the number of passes and the thickness of layers to be compacted
shall take account of the material to be compacted and the installed pipe. Compaction by saturating the
side fill and backfill is permissible only in exceptional cases in non-cohesive soil. All pipes shall be laid
true to the line and level within tolerances indicated in applicable codes and standards. Any necessary
adjustment to the level shall be made by raising or lowering the bedding, always ensuring that the pipes
are finally provided with the minimum thickness of bedding layer and full support along their whole length.
Permanent adjustments shall never be made by local packing.
3 03 03 02
Pipe Laying of Flexible Pipes
3 03 03 02 01
UPVC Pipes
UPVC pipes shall be laid in compliance with ASTM D 2321 unless otherwise indicated. The pipes shall be
bedded true to line and grade with uniform and continuous support from a firm base. Blocking shall not be
used to bring the pipe to grade. Pipe bedding shall be at least 150 mm thick, class I bedding material,
carefully placed in the trench bottom. To avoid loss of side support, the same material shall be used for
haunching up to the spring line of the pipe. Initial backfill shall be selected material as specified in Section
02200 Earthwork. Haunching and initial backfilling shall comply with procedures given in ASTM D 2321
for wet and dry conditions.
Compaction of haunching and initial backfill shall be done in such a way so that compaction equipment is
not used directly above the pipe until sufficient backfill has been placed to ensure that such compaction
equipment will not damage the pipe.
3 03 03 02 02
Glass-fibre Reinforced Thermosetting Pipes
Pipes shall be lowered into the trench using equipment suitable for the weight and size of the pipes. Pipes
< DN 300 may be lowered by hand using suitable ropes.
Where the pipeline is suspected to be subject to movement due to ground settlement or temperature
variation, a gap shall be left between the end of the spigot and the bottom of the socket to allow for
tolerable changes of direction and/or length.
Unless otherwise indicated, pipe installation shall comply with the principles given in ASTM D 3839.
3 03 03 03
Pipe Laying of Rigid Pipes
3 03 03 03 01
Vitrified Clay Pipes
Sand is suitable as a bedding material in a total sand environment but may be unsuitable where high and
rapidly changing water tables are present in the pipe zone. It may be also unsuitable for pipe bedding or
haunching in a trench cut by blazing or in trenches through clay type soil. Vitrified clay pipes shall be laid
in compliance with ASTM C 12 unless otherwise indicated.
01.0
Class A bedding, pipe bedded with concrete cradle, or bedded in
carefully placed granular material, so that the material fills and supports the
haunch area and top half of the pipe covered with monolithic reinforced concrete
arch where indicated. Minimum concrete strength 20.7 MPa (3000 psi).
Place pipe in proper position on temporary supports, or, when necessary, rigidly
anchor or weight the pipe to prevent floatation as concrete is placed.
02.0
Class B bedding, pipe bedded and carefully placed in granular material,
so that the material fills and supports the haunch area and encases the pipe to
the limits shown in the trench diagrams.
Granular material shall be well-graded 6-19 mm crushed stone or other nonconsolidating bedding material not subject to migration.
03.0
Class C bedding, pipe bedded and carefully placed in locally available
material (pea gravel, sand), so that the material fills and supports the haunch
area. Initial backfill shall be selected material
26
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
04.0
Class D bedding on trench bottom, with holes for pipe sockets excavated
to prevent point loading of the socket or coupling and to establish full-length
support of the pipe barrel.
05.0
Where indicated or appropriate, the pipe shall be encased completely
with concrete, minimum thickness, at any point, one fourth of the outside
diameter of the pipe or 100 mm, whichever is greater.
Place pipe in proper position on temporary supports, or, when necessary, rigidly
anchor or weight the pipe to prevent floatation as concrete is placed.
06.0
Where indicated or appropriate, the pipe shall be encased completely
with crushed stone, minimum thickness beneath the pipe shall be 100 mm or one
eighth of the outside pipe diameter, which ever is greater, upwards to the
horizontal plane at the top of the pipe barrel, carefully placed, so that the material
fills and supports the haunch area. Encasement shall be of well-graded crushed
stone or other non-consolidating bedding material not subject to migration.
3 03 03 03 02
Cast Iron Pipes
Pipes shall be lowered into the trench with tackle suitable for the mass of the pipes. For pipe diameters >
DN 250, a mobile crane or a well designed set of shear legs shall be used and the positioning of the sling
checked, when the pipe is just clear of the ground, to ensure a proper balance. The inside of sockets and
the outside of spigots shall be cleaned for at least the insertion depth for each joint. Where lifting gear has
been used to place the pipe in the trench, it shall be used to support the pipe and assist centralizing the
spigot in the socket. Where the pipeline is suspected to be subject to movement due to ground
settlement or temperature variation, a suitable gap shall be left between the end of the spigot and the
bottom of the socket.
3 03 04
Pipe Bedding and Laying of Subsoil Drainage Pipes
Pipes shall be laid so that the sides of the pipes are bedded with uniform and continuous support. Side fill
material shall be suitable granular material properly placed and compacted to provide lateral restraint.
When the pipes are to be laid in a rock cut, the trench shall be over-excavated to a depth of 150 mm
below grade level and this space filled to grade with suitable granular bedding material and tamped to
provide a firm foundation.
Pipes shall be bedded as indicated or/and approved by the Engineer as follows:
01.0
on the undisturbed trench bottom
02.0
on a concrete bedding
03.0
on a granular bedding in cut rock
If a granular pipe bedding is not indicated, the undisturbed trench bottom or concrete bedding shall be
shaped with a trapezoidal groove to provide support for the pipe and maintaining alignment. Pipes shall
be covered with a sand-gravel filter layer as indicated. The minimum thickness of the filter layer above the
top of the pipe shall be 150 mm. Where a non-biodegradable filter fabric is used as filter, the fabric shall
be placed immediately on the top of the pipe, covering the full width of the trench unless otherwise
indicated. During installation protect all open joints with joint cover when a sand-gravel mixture is used as
a filter. General backfilling of trenches shall comply with requirement given in Section 02200 Earthwork.
3 03 05
Pipe Jointing
3 03 05 01
General
Where it is necessary to cut rigid pipes, use a professional pipe cutter so as to leave a clean end square
to the axis of the pipe. Cut plastic pipes with a fine tooth saw.
Where required or recommended by the pipe manufacturer, chamfer cut spigots.
Where a part of a factory prepared flexible joint system has been cut off in order to shorten a pipe and a
rigid joint has to be used, ensure that the overall length of the rigidly jointed pipes is not greater than the
normal length of a pipe used in the installation. For joints between different materials, use only correct
adapters or techniques in accordance with referenced standards and manufacturers instructions.
27
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
3 03 05 02
ODAC
Flexible Joints for Rigid Pipes
When fixing flexible ring joints for rigid pipes, the retrained elastomeric ring or gasket shall be located
within the spigot or sleeve or by means of a moulding in the spigot. Ensure that any lubrication of ring,
spigot or socket is strictly in accordance with pipe manufacturers instructions and that only recommended
lubricants are used. When rolling ring joints are used, apply no lubricant on the rolling ring joints. Place
the elastomeric ring or gasket on the tip of the spigot unless otherwise recommended by the
manufacturer. Ensure that the jointing faces of the pipes are dry, clean and free from soil or bedding
particles. Lay the spigot of the pipe squarely into the socket after bedding material has been removed to
accommodate the socket. For pipe diameter up to DN 300, push the joint home by hand or by using a
lever while protecting the spigot of the pipes with a piece of timber. For larger pipe diameters use joints
tackle such as strong-hads and winches.
3 03 05 03
Rigid Joints for Clayware and Concrete
Make rigid joints (spigot and socket joints) only where indicated by caulking with tarred rope yarn to
centralize the spigot and to prevent the entry of cement into the bore. Fill the joint with stiff mortar
(cement : sand / 1 : 3) and fillet the mortar beyond the socket.
Protect newly made joints from premature drying and do not subject them to the test pressure for at least
48 hours after making.
3 03 05 04
Rigid Joints for Cast-Iron Pipes
Make rigid joints (spigot and socket joints) only where indicated. Joint spigot and socket by first caulking
with suitable yarn to centralize the spigot and to prevent the entry of jointing material in the bore. Then
run molten lead or caulk lead yarn into the full depth of the joint to a minimum depth of 50 mm.
After the joint has cooled caulk to finish the joint flush with the socket end.
3 03 05 05
Rigid Solvent-welded Joints for Plastic Pipes
Make rigid joints only where indicated strictly in accordance with manufacturers instructions. Ensure that
surfaces are clean. After jointing clean off any surplus material. Where pipeline assemblies have been
jointed outside the trench, do not lower them into the trench until the period for complete setting has
expired.
3 03 06
Sanitary Sewerage Collecting Tanks
See relevant Sections 03300 Cast-in Place Concrete, 03400 Precast Concrete, 05100 Structural Steel or
as indicated otherwise.
3 03 07
Stormwater Collecting Tanks
See relevant Sections 03300 Cast-in Place Concrete, 03400 Precast Concrete, 05100 Structural Steel or
as indicated otherwise.
3 03 08
Accessories
3 03 08 01
3 03 08 01 01
General
Carry out the construction of manholes, inspection chambers, etc. in close sequence with pipe laying and
in accordance with drawings. Build in channels for the whole length of the manhole or inspection
chamber, using the same material as for the pipeline unless otherwise indicated. When bedding items of
PVC or similar material on a cementious bedding, use special clips or provide a mechanical key to the
PVC items in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
Form any concrete benching required vertically from the channel to the height of the soffit of the outlet,
then form a radius of 25 mm and rise with a slope of approximately 1 in 12 to the walls of the manhole.
Finish benching smooth.
Apply on all external masonry surfaces a cement plaster and a bituminous waterproofing for all surfaces
in contact with soil unless otherwise indicated.
28
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
3 03 08 01 02
ODAC
Brickwork Construction
Before commencing brickwork, construct a concrete slab base at least 150 mm thick, concrete class C 25
unless otherwise indicated. Construct walls at least 200 mm thick. Fill joints with cement mortar at least 4
mm but not more than 6 mm thick, flush jointed as the work proceeds. For further requirements see
Section 04200 Unit Masonry.
3 03 08 01 03
Precast Concrete Construction
Ensure that precast concrete units are vertical and correctly aligned. Either ensure that there is a full bed
of cement mortar in the joints and finish jointing flush internally, or use proprietary jointing material in
accordance with manufacturers instructions.
For further requirements see Section 03400 Precast Concrete.
3 03 08 01 05
Step Irons
Fix step irons into manholes at every fourth course or at intervals of between 230 mm and 300 mm so
that the top step is not more than 750 mm below the surface and the bottom step not more than 450 mm
above the benching. Maintain the steps at constant intervals. Stagger step irons in two vertical rows at
300 mm centers.
3 03 08 01 06
Cover Frames
Except for pre-fitted cover frames and unless otherwise indicated, bed the cover frame and immediately
insert the lid in position ensuring the bed mortar is still plastic.
Bed the cover frame solidly in cement mortar over the whole of the seating area.
3 03 09
Water Treatment
Any sewerage water evacuated from a building or a building site to a public sewer line or disposed
otherwise shall be adequately treated.
Any possible contamination, impurity, etc. shall not exceed limit values jointly set forth by the Ministry of
Agriculture and the Ministry of Municipal & Rural Affairs (MOMRA) in compliance with Royal Decree No.
M/6 dated 13.2.1421H.
3 04
Field Quality Control
3 04 01
General
Testing for leak tightness of pipelines, manholes, and inspection chambers etc. shall be conducted either
with air or water as indicated. In the case of air tests, the number of corrections and retests following a
failure is unrestricted. In the event of a single or continued air test failure, recourse to a water test will be
acceptable and the result of the water test shall be decisive. If the groundwater level is above the top of
the pipeline during testing, an infiltration test may be required by the Engineer at no additional costs.
Initial testing may be required by the Engineer before any backfilling is placed. However, for final
acceptance, the pipeline, manhole, inspection chamber etc. shall be tested after backfilling and removal
of sheeting (if any).
3 04 02
Visual Inspection
Carry out general inspections both during the progress of works and of the complete installation. These
inspections shall include but not be limited to:
-Checking line and level
-Checking joints
-Checking for damage or deformation
-Checking connections
-Checking linings and coatings
-Checking setting of covers and frames in manholes, inspection and other
chambers
29
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
-Checking pipes entering or leaving structures

-testing pipe profile by passing a sphere of diameter 5% less than the pipe
diameter through all pipelines.
3 04 03
Tests
3 04 03 01
Pre-test Procedures for Air- and Water Test
Ensure the safety of operatives and other personnel involved in testing. Provide secure access and
ensure support to trenches is maintained. Ensure that the pipeline section is adequately anchored against
movement before any pressure test is applied.
Stop open ends with approved plugs, stoppers or blank caps, properly jointed and secured to resist the
pressure applied. Where a water test is applied ensure that the means of releasing water from the drain
stopper can be operated from surface level.
Remove obstructions, debris and superfluous matter from sections of pipeline, manholes and inspection
chambers and flush it out with water before testing. Using great care and wearing protective clothing
including gloves and eye shields, clean surfaces with suitable cleaners if needed and hose down treated
surfaces thoroughly with water.
3 04 03 02
Air Test
Suitable airtight plugs shall be used in order to avoid errors arising from the test equipment. Testing times
for pipelines (excluding manholes and inspection chambers) shall comply with Table 1 / Annex 6 in
relation to pipe size and testing method applied.
The testing method to be used shall be approved by the Engineer. For safety reasons, special care is
required for large DN during testing. An initial pressure approximately 10% in access of the required test
pressure, shall first be held for approximately 5 minutes. The pressure shall then be adjusted to the test
pressure shown in Table 1 / Annex 6 related to the testing method. If the pressure drop measured after
the testing time is less than delta p given in Table 1 / Annex 6, the pipeline complies with this
Specification. The equipment used for measuring the pressure drop shall allow a measurement with an
accuracy of 10% of delta p. The accuracy of measurement of time shall be 5 seconds. Until there is
sufficient experience of air testing manholes and inspection chambers, and when approved by the
Engineer, testing time of half that for a pipeline of equivalent diameter may be used.
Air testing of vitrified clay pipes in compliance with ASTM may be in accordance with ASTM C 828 unless
otherwise indicated.
3 04 03 03
Water Test
The test pressure is the pressure equivalent to or resulting from filling the test section up to the ground
level of the downstream or upstream manhole, as appropriate, with a maximum pressure of 50 kPa and a
minimum pressure of 10 kPa measured at the top of the pipe. Higher test pressure may be applied and
required by the Engineer for parts of pipelines, which are designed to operate under permanent or
temporary surcharge. After the pipelines and/or manholes are filled and the required pressure applied,
conditioning may be necessary.
Testing time shall be 30 minutes. In case of concrete pipes, testing time shall be 60 minutes. Test
pressure shall be maintained within 1 kPa of the test pressure applied by topping up with water. The total
amount of water added during the test to achieve this requirement shall be measured and recorded with
the head of water at the required test pressure.
The test requirement is satisfied if the amount of water added is not greater than:
-0,15 l/m2 wetted internal surface during 30 minutes for pipelines
-0,20l/m2 wetted internal surface during 30 minutes for pipelines including
manholes
-0,40 l/m2 wetted internal surface during 30 minutes for manholes and inspection
chambers.
Unless otherwise indicated, testing of individual joints, instead of testing of the whole pipeline, will be
accepted for pipelines larger than DN 1000.
30
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
3 04 03 05
Miscellaneous Tests
3 04 03 05 01
Leak tightness of Concrete Tanks
Testing for leakage, to determine leakage below water, shall be performed using either vacuum testing or
water-pressure testing as approved by the Engineer.
Vacuum Testing:
Seal the empty tank and apply a vacuum to 50 mm of mercury. The tank is deemed to be leakage tight, if
90% of vacuum is held for 2 minutes.
Water-Pressure Testing:
Seal the tank, fill with water, and let stand for 24 hours. Then refill the tank. The tank deemed to be
leakage tight, if water level is held for one hour.
3 04 03 05 02
Testing of Bedding Material
Carry out tests to determine the suitability of granular material to be used for any bedding and side fills.
3 04 03 05 04
Testing of Sewerage Water
Carry out all necessary tests required to ensure that all sewerage water evacuated from a building or a
building site is not contaminated and the given limit values set forth by the Ministry of Agriculture and the
Ministry of Municipal & Rural Affairs (MOMRA) are not exceeded. (see Royal Decree No. M/6 dated
13.2.1421H)
3 04 04
as required:
-the location of pipeline or other item tested and the date of the test or inspection
-the results
-the personnel involved
3 05
Adjusting and Cleaning
Immediately before handing over and inspection of drainage works, flush out the complete installation and
remove any remaining silt and debris.
3 07
Protection
Protect completed sections of pipelines, manholes, tanks, and all other work from damage by
construction traffic and work of other trades.
31
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC

4 01
General
The quantities to be paid for will be measured from approved drawings.

For measurement of excavation and general backfilling see Section 02200 Earthwork.
4 02
Units of Measurement
manholes, but over all bends, branches, adapters and the like, giving the depth of the pipeline in depthrange stages.
placed.
Concrete beds, concrete haunching and surrounding, and concrete cradles will be measured by length
(linear meter) between manholes, but over all bends, branches, and the like.
Bends, branches, adapters and the like will be enumerated as extra-over the pipeline in which they occur.
Collecting tanks, manholes and inspection chambers will be enumerated, indicating type, size, step irons,
plaster, waterproofing, fittings, accessories and the like.
Manhole covers including frame, cleanouts, will be enumerated, indicating type, material, size, etc.
Accessories e.g. pumps and other equipment will be enumerated, indicating type, size, quality,
performance criteria, bedding in concrete and providing gratings, sealing plates, and the like.
32
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC

5 01
General
storage facilities, water, power and for all labour including samples, mock-ups, cutting and jointing, coordination work with other trades, checking, testing, quality assurance, cleaning and protecting and
including but not limited to ancillary works as indicated below.
When a complete structure or unit e.g. a septic tank, manhole, and the like is specified as the unit of
measurement, the unit will include all necessary fittings and accessories.
5 02
Ancillary Works to be included in the Unit Rate
Connections to public mains or existing piping.
Pipe bedding including hand trimming trench bottom.
Pipework support e.g. sheeting and the like.
Side fills and initial backfill of pipelines
Preparation of shop drawings
Preparation of working drawings.
33
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC

6 01
Tables
Table 1: Test Pressure, Pressure Drop and Testing Times for
Testing with Air (EN 1610)
Material
Testing
method
Po
*)
Mbar
10
(1)
Unsoaked Concrete
pipes
min
mbar
(kPa)
LA
Testing time
DN 100
DN 200
DN 300
DN 400
DN 600
DN 800
DN 1000
(kPa)
2,5
3
4
(,25)
LB
50
10
(5)
(1)
100
15
LC
(10)
LD
200
(20)
KP-values
(1,5)
1
15
LA
1
5
(1,5)
**)
Soaked concrete
pipes and all other
materials
10
2,5
(1)
(0,25)
0,058
0,058
0,053
0,040
0,0267
0,020
0,016
10
14
19
24
LB
50
10
(5)
(1)
100
15
(10)
(1,5)
200
15
(20)
(1,5)
LC
LD
11
15
19
11
14
1,5
1,5
2,5
34
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
KP-values
*)
**)
ODAC
0,058
**)
0,058
0,040
0,030
0,020
0,015
pressure above atmospheric pressure.
t=
1
Kp
X In
po
Po - p
for unsoaked concrete pipes,
K
P
16
DN
with a maximum of 0,058.
For soaked concrete pipes and all other materials
With t rounded to the nearest 0,5 min when
K
P
12
DN
with a maximum of 0,058.
t 5 min, and the nearest minute when t > 5 min.
In = log
Table 2: Coarse Aggregate for Granular Pipe Bedding

Sieve size
mm
50,0
37,5
20,0
14,0
10,0
5,0
2,36
Percentage by mass passing BS sieves for nominal sizes

Graded aggregate
Single sized aggregate
mm
mm
40 to 5
20 to 5
14 to 5
40
20
14
10
100
100
90-100
100
85-100
100
35-70
90-100
100
0-25
85-100
100
90-100
85-100
100
10-40
30-60
50-85
0-5
0-25
0-50
85-100
0-5
0-10
0-10
0-5
0-10
0-25
0-5
5
100
45-100
0-30
Table 3: Fine Aggregate for Granular Pipe Bedding

Sieve size
10,00 mm
5,00 mm
2,36 mm
1,18 mm
600 microm.
300 microm.
150 microm.
Percentage by mass passing BS sieve

Overall limits
Additional limits for grading
C
M
F
100
89-100
60-100
60-100
65-100
80-100
30-100
30-90
45-100
70-100
15-100
15-54
25-80
55-100
5-70
5-40
5-48
5-70
0-15
-
Table 4: All-in Aggregate for Granular Pipe Bedding
35
0,012
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Sieve size
*)
Percentage by mass passing BS sieves for nominal sizes

40 mm
20 mm
10 mm
5 mm
50,0 mm
100
37,5 mm
95-100
100
20,0 mm
45-80
95-100
14,0 mm
100
10,0 mm
95-100
100
5,00 mm
25-50
35-55
35-65
70-100
2,36 mm
20-50
25-100
1,18 mm
15-40
15-45
600 microm.
8-30
10-35
10-30
5-25
300 microm.
5-15
3-20
150 m
0-8*)
0-8*)
0-8*)
0-15
Increased to10 % for crushed rock fines
36
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
6 02
ODAC
Figures
Fig. 1: Terminology of ASTM C 12
Fig. 2 : Class A Concrete Cradle (ASTM C 12)
37
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Fig. 3: Class A Concrete Arch (ASTM C 12)
Fig. 4: Crushed stone encasement (ASTM C 12)
38
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Fig. 5: Class B Pipe Bedding (ASTM C 12)
Fig. 6: Class C Pipe Bedding (ASTM C 12)
39
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Fig. 7: Class D Pipe Bedding (ASTM C 12)
40
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 02810 Irrigation Systems
Division
02 - Sitework
Section
02810 - Irrigation Systems
Part 1: General
1 01 Summary
The work covered by this section consists of providing all tools, labour, equipment, and materials, and
performing all operations in connection with irrigation of landscaped areas on building sites.
The final design of the irrigation system shall be prepared by the Contractor.
1 01 01
1 01 04
Section Includes
01.0
Irrigation system
02.0
Irrigation water storage facility
Related Sections
02200 Earthwork
02900 Landscaping
15400 Plumbing
16000 Applicable Sections of Division 16 - Electrical
1 02 References
1 02 01
1 02 01 03
1 02 01 03 01

ISO 7749-1 : 95 identical with BS 7459-1
ISO 7749-2 : 90 identical with BS 7459-2
ISO 9260 : 91
Emitters Specification and Test Methods First Edition
1 02 01 04
USA Standards
1 02 01 04 01

ASTM C 118M: 95
Drainage (Metric)
Standard Specification for Concrete Pipe for Irrigation or
ASTM C 505M: 95
Standard Specification for Non-reinforced Concrete
Irrigation Pipe with Rubber Gasket Joints (Metric)
ASTM D 1527: 99
Styrene (ABS) Plastic Pipe, Schedule 40 and 80
for
ASTM D 1785: 99
Standard Specification for Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC)
Plastic Pipe, Schedule 40, 80, 120
ASTM D 2104: 99
Pipe, Schedule 40

1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
ASTM D 2235: 96
Cement
for
ASTM D 2239: 99
Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastic Pipe
(SIDR-PR) Based on Controlled Inside Diameter
ASTM D 2241: 96
Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR Series)
ASTM D 2282: 99
Styrene (ABS) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR)
for
ASTM D 2464: 96
Standard Specification for
Chloride)(PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80
Acrylonitrile-ButadieneThreaded
Poly
(Vinyl
ASTM D 2466: 96
ASTM D 2467: 96
ASTM D 2468: 96
Styrene (ABS) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40
for
Acrylonitrilr-Butadiene-
ASTM D 2564: 96
(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems
ASTM D 2666: 96
Tubing
ASTM D 3000: 95
Pipe (SDR-PR) Based on Outside Diameter
ASTM D 3035: 95
Pipe (SDR-PR) Based on Controlled Outside Diameter
ASTM F 402: 93
Standard Practice for Safe Handling of Solvent
Cements, Primers, and Cleaners Used for Jointing Thermoplastic Pipe and
Fittings
ASTM F 690: 94
Thermoplastic Pressure Piping Irrigation Systems
ASTM F 771: 99
Standard
Specification
for
Thermoplastic High-Pressure Irrigation Pipeline Systems
Polyethylene
(PE)
ASTM F 878: 95:

Standard
Specification
Thermoplastic Thin-Wall Drip Irrigation Tubing
Polybutylene
(PB)
for
ASTM F 1176: 93
Standard Practice for Design and Installation of
Thermoplastic Irrigation Systems with Maximum Pressure of 63 psi
1 02 01 05
European Standards
1 02 01 06
British Standards
BS 4991: 98
Specification for propylene copolymer pressure pipe
BS 7459
Rotating Sprinklers for Irrigation Equipment
BS 7459-1: 95 Specification for Design and Operational Requirements

BS 7459-2: 91 Methods of Test for Uniformity of Distribution
BS 7462
Planning, Design and Installation of Irrigation Schemes
BS 7462-5: 93 Guide for Irrigation Equipment
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
1 03 Definitions
1 03 01
Technical Terms
Air release valve - a valve to release airs or gas which tends to accumulate at
high points on pipelines
Air valve - any valve to discharge air when pipes are being filled or to admit air
when they are being emptied
Anchorage thrust or anchor-blocks, usually of concrete, placed along the
pressured pipeline to prevent or reduce stress due to water pressure.
Application rate - the rate at which water is applied to the soil by the sprinklers
in pattern
Arc - the degree of coverage of a sprinkler from one side or throw to the other. A
90 deg. Arc is a quarter circle sprinkler
Automatic control valve - a valve in a sprinkler system, which is activated by an
automatic controller by way of control, lines
Automatic pump - a pump provided with a flow switch which starts and stops
the pump automatically depending on the water level in a suction sump, tank, or
other water storage
Ball valve - a form of shut-off device, having a ball, which can be turned to move
its port or ports relative to the body seat, ports to control the flow of fluid
Bubbler a device to apply water either as a small stream of water or as a spray
to a localized area around individual plants.
Butterfly valve - a circular disc fitted inside a pipe and hinged at two pivots on a
diameter axis
Centrifugal pump - a rotodynamic pump with an impeller of primarily radial
design (SASO 1305).
Deflector - that part of a sprinkler head on which water impinges and which is
designed to distribute the water in a specified fashion
Dripper see emitter
Discharge - the volume of fluid per unit of time flowing along a pipe, or the
output rate of a device or equipment such as a pump
Discharge valve - a valve in a pipeline for increasing or reducing the flow.
Emitter a device fitted to an irrigation lateral and intended to emit water in the
form of drops or continuous flow
Filter - a device made of or containing a porous material used to collect particles
from a liquid passing through.
Final design include shop and working drawings with all necessary structural,
electrical and mechanical calculations, indicating all materials, products and
systems
Flow - the quantity of water flowing in a channel, conduit, or pipe expressed in
volume per unit of time
Flow control valve - a valve which fluctuates so the preset demand remains
constant regardless of supply
Foot valve - a non-return valve placed at the foot of a column of pipes, such as
the suction line of a pump
Friction head - the energy or head lost due to hydraulic friction in a pipe or open
channel
Friction loss - the energy or head lost due to hydraulic friction in a pipe
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Gate valves - valve those closes or regulates the flow in a pipeline by a plate
sliding at right angles to the flow.
Globe valve - a water valve in the form of a circular metal disc, which is moved
by a threaded spindle
Head - the potential energy of water due to its height above a given level
Head spray - the maximum height of a spray above the irrigation head nozzle,
when operating at nominal working pressure
Hydraulic valve - a valve activated by the water pressure
Infiltration rate - the rate at which water is absorbed, or seeps into, or through
the interstices of a soil
Inlet - upstream end of a conduit or pipe
Non-return valve - valve that prevents reversal of flow (back flow preventer)
Nozzle that part of the irrigation head through which the water spray is
discharged.
Pressure rating (PR) the estimated maximum pressure that the medium in the
pipe can exert continuously with a high degree of certainty that failure of the pipe
will not occur (ASTM F 771)
Pressure sustaining valve valve that maintains a predetermined pressure
upstream of its position in a pipeline
Prime mover - an internal-combustion engine or electric motor, which converts
energy into mechanical power
Solenoid valve - electrically operated control valve, used to activate a hydraulic
valve
Sprinkler head - a device sealing an aperture in a pipe of a sprinkler installation
that discharges water automatically in a predetermined pattern over a specified
area
Stop valve - a valve to stop or start the flow of water, usually in a pipe
Strainer - a perforated pipe, cylinder, or similar tube. It allows the passage of
water but not large particles
Surge - a sudden increase of pressure in a pipeline resulting from closing a valve
at its lower end
Surge pipe - a stand pipe with an open top to release surge pressure
Water hammer - a shock wave created by a fast-closing valve
Working pressure - the maximum pressure, which a piping system can sustain
in continuous use under given service, conditions without pressure surge (ISO
4422).
1 03 02
Abbreviations
DN
Nominal size
Q.C.
Quality Control
1 04 System Description
The irrigation system shall be as shown on Drawings, diagrams or other Contract Documents and shall
consist of:
01.0
A sprinkler system utilizing bubblers and emitters and shall include an

underground water storage tank, buried main, submain pipes, and
laterals. The system shall incorporate all necessary filters, valves,
pressure gauges, and an automatic controller.
4
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
1 04 01
ODAC
02.0
The system shall be electric solenoid controlled.
03.0
The irrigation water source shall be:
04.0
Pumped underground water
05.0
Public water supply.
Design Requirements
In case the final design is part of the Contract and has to be prepared by the Contractor, the following
shall be considered in the final design:
A seasonal profile of the water requirement of the landscaped area shall be determined to assess how
often, and by how much, the area or individual plants and trees need to be watered. This shall include the
peak water requirement to determine the irrigation system capacity. In case establishing such a seasonal
profile seems not to be appropriate in all cases as agreed by the Engineer, for trees 10 liter per day and
for grassed areas 6 liter per day shall be taken into consideration unless otherwise indicated.
The method to determine the individual crop water requirements shall be approved by the Engineer.
The design of pipework and fittings shall consider all friction losses and shall provide a correct overall
system performance.
The design water velocity in any pipeline when operating at system capacity generally shall not exceed
1.5 m/s except under controlled circumstances. In this case, specific safety practices to protect the
pipeline shall be provided; e.g. positive acting pressure relief valves, slowly filling the pipeline and
bringing it up to pressure. Consideration shall be given to assure that proper pressure or air relief valves
or both are provided with all velocities. The maximum design velocity shall not exceed 2.4 m/s.
The irrigation system shall be designed to avoid any water hammer and surge. This may include but shall
not be limited to:
-Reducing the effective length by the incorporation of more valves of a suitable
specification in the pipeline.
-Reducing the velocity
-Increasing the closing time of valves
-Installing suitable pressure regulating valves
-Installing suitable air valves
To provide surge protection, the maximum allowable working pressure shall not exceed 72% of the
pressure rating of any pipe or equipment.
External anchorage of pipelines shall be considered where necessary. This shall include but shall not be
limited to:
-Anchorage at all changes in direction
-Anchorage at points of termination of waterflow
-Anchorage at all tees, end caps, bends, valves and the like.
All outlets shall have adequate capacity at the design working pressure to deliver the design flow to the
distribution system at the design operating pressure of the system; that means sprinklers, bubblers,
emitters, etc.
Provisions shall be made for draining the pipelines to a point where the pipe is less than half full of water
or the manufacturer of the pipe recommends drainage. If drainage cannot be provided by gravity,
provisions shall be made to empty the pipeline by pumping.
1 05 Submittals
In compliance with Conditions of Contract and provisions of Section 01300, the following shall be
submitted:
01.0
thirty (30) days before irrigation works are scheduled to commence.

5
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
1 05 01
ODAC
Product Data
furnished and installed include manufacturers certifications showing compliance with requirements.
Manufacturers operating and maintenance requirements if applicable.
1 05 02
Shop Drawings
Shop drawings for main and submain pipes including manholes

Shop drawings for water tank(s), pump station if any, sump pits, inspection chambers, and the like.
Shop drawings for filters, valves, pressure gauges, automatic controller and the like.
Co-ordination drawings showing pipe sizes and manholes, locations, elevations, and other piping in the
same trench, including connections to irrigation equipment.
1 05 03
Samples
Accompanying the above submittal, the Contractor shall submit samples of each item of adequate size
and construction
1 05 04
Documented experience of Contractors site supervisor

Records and reports of Contractors Internal Q.C.
Records and reports of Contractors field Q.C.
year) including corrective actions taken by the Contractor if necessary.
Reports and records shall be available for assessment to the Engineer not later than three (3) days after
testing and checking.
Reports and records shall be established and maintained in a manner to ensure traceability.
indicated.
1 06 01
Qualifications
documented experience in works related to irrigation of landscaped areas and shall have successfully
completed works similar in design, material, and extent to that indicated for the Project.
Installers shall be familiar with the material and installation procedures indicated and shall be skilled and
trained.
1 06 04
Quality Control
1 06 04 01
Checking of suppliers test certificates and certificates of compliance to conform to specification and
referenced standards prior to first delivery.
Checking of suppliers delivery tickets of each delivery for completeness and compliance with supply
order and specification.
Checking of label and condition of pipes, components and irrigation equipment of each delivery, particular
to ensure that;
-Pipes, components and irrigation equipment are undamaged
-Protective coatings of pipes and fittings are undamaged
6
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
-Where pipes are provided with factory applied jointing material, this material is in proper condition
Checking if equipment and tools are in a serviceable condition at least every week
Checking of the correct storage of pipes, components, and irrigation equipment at least every week
Field Quality Control as indicated.

1 07 01
Moving pipes and equipment shall be held to a minimum to reduce the possibility of damage.
Whether moved by hands, hoists, or other acceptable method, pipe and equipment shall not be thrown,
dropped, dragged, bumped, or allowed to impact on objects that causes damage.
1 07 02
Package units on the ground shall be protected by appropriate pieces of timber.

When unloading individual pipes, the pipes shall be placed on wooden supports, placed about one-fifth of
the length of the pipe from each end.
Rubber gaskets and similar material shall be stored in their original containers and kept away from oil,
grease, direct sunlight, sources of ozone such as fluorescent light and electric motors, excessive heat
and areas where temperatures exceed 60 deg. C.
All plastic pipes and similar material shall be kept away from direct sunlight.

1 08 01
Existing Conditions
Identify and determine unexpected variations to subsoil conditions, water sources, or discovery of
uncharted utility lines or other facilities.
Repair any damage to existing utility lines or other facilities and pay all associated costs.
1 08 02
Refer to Section 01060 Regulatory Requirements, 1 01 02 .

Comply with any applicable portion of local environmental regulations pertaining to irrigation of
landscaped areas on building sites.
7
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Part 2: Products
2 01 Pipes and Fittings
All pipe, pipe fitting material and components shall be compatible with each other and shall be designed
and manufactured for the intended use, nature of fluid, pressure, and temperature.
All jointing material shall be of material, composition and size that will not damage the pipe and shall be
suitable for use at the design pressure for the pipeline.
2 01 01
Plastic Pipes
2 01 01 01
Polyethylene (PE) Thermoplastic Pipes
Polyethylene (PE) Thermoplastic pipes shall comply with Standard(s)indicated:

01.0
ASTM F 771 high pressure irrigation pipe, pressure rating (PR) from 550
to 1380 kPa (80-200 psi) depending on pipe diameter; PE-grading (PE 24 to PE
34) to comply with hydrostatic system design stress,
02.0
ASTM D 3035 Polyethylene (PE) plastic pipe (DR-PR), based on
controlled outside diameter, pipe diameter, dimension ratio (DR), and pressure
rating (PR) as indicated.
03.0
ASTM D 2104 Polyethylene (PE) plastic pipe, Schedule 40, pipes
diameter and pressure rating (PR) as indicated.
04.0
ASTM D 2239 Polyethylene (PE) plastic pipe (SIDR-PR), pipe diameter,
standard dimension ration (SDR) and pressure rating (PR) as indicated.
2 01 01 02
Polybutylene (PB) Thermoplastic Pipes
Polybutylene (PB) pipes shall comply with Standard(s) indicated:

01.0
ASTM F 878 thermoplastic thin-wall drip irrigation tubing, pressure rating
(PR) depending on type and test temperature,
01.1
type DR 17, internal pipe diameter 14.7 mm (0.580 inch).
01.2
type DR 21, internal pipe diameter 14.7 mm (0.580 inch)
02.0
ASTM D 2666 Polybutylene (PB) plastic tubing, pipe diameter as
indicated,
02.1
type SDR 9; pressure rating (PR)1.72 MPa (250 psi)
02.2
type SDR 13.5, pressure rating (PR) 1.10 MPa (160 psi)
03.0
ASTM D 3000 Polybutylene (PB) plastic pipe (SDR-PR), pipe diameter
as indicated;
2 01 01 03
03.1
type SDR 9, pressure rating (PR) 1.72 MPa (250 psi).
03.2
03.3
type SDR 13.5, pressure rating (PR) 1.10 MPa (160 psi).
03.4
Poly-Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipes
PVC pipes shall comply with Standard(s) indicated:

01.0
SASO 14, unplasticized Poly Vinyl Chloride (uPVC), pipe diameter as
indicated,
01.1
Type class 1, nominal pressures 2.5 kg/cm2.
01.2
Type class 2, nominal pressures 4 kg/cm2.
01.3

8
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
02.0
01.4
01.5
ASTM D 1785 Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) plastic pipe,
02.1
indicated.
type Schedule 40, pipe diameter and pressure rating (PR) as
02.2
indicated.
02.3
indicated.
03.0
ASTM D 2241 Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) plastic pipe, pipe diameter,
standard dimension ratio (SDR) and pressure rating (PR) as indicated.
2 01 01 04
Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Plastic Pipes
Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) pipes shall comply with Standard(s) indicated:

01.0 ASTM D 1527 Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) plastic pipe,
01.1 type Schedule 40, pipe diameter and pressure rating (PR) as indicated.
01.2 type Schedule 80, pipe diameter and pressure rating (PR) as indicated.
06.0 ASTM D 2282 Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) plastic pipe, pipe
diameter, standard dimension ratio (SDR) and pressure rating (PR) as
indicated.
2 01 01 05
Propylene Copolymer Pressure Pipe

Note: To be specified by the Project Specifier when desired! BS 4991 specify
such pipes in two series: Series 1 for use with potable water, foodstuffs and
pharmaceuticals. Series 2 for use with chemicals, including water at temperatures
up to 100 deg. C.
2 02 01
Valves and Gauges
Valves shall be electrically, hydraulically or mechanically operated as indicated in the system design or
required by the valve manufacturer.
2 02 01 08
Pressure Gauges
Pressure Gauges shall be filled with Glycerin and hermetically sealed. All working parts shall be corrosion
resistant. Dial face shall allow an easy reading of water pressure up to 6 bar unless otherwise indicated.
2 02 01 09
Valve Boxes
All remote control valves, manual control valves, isolation valves etc. shall be installed in valve boxes
made of concrete, thermoplastic or other suitable approved material
The valve box shall provide protection for the valve and shall be of adequate size to allow access to the
valve for operation, maintenance and repair including enough space to allow removal of the valve and
access to the connectors each side of the valve.
The valve box shall be provided with length and side extensions to bring the valve box level with finished
ground level unless otherwise indicated.
The valve box shall be supplied with an approved cast iron, concrete, or thermoplastic cover of sufficient
strength to withstand all expected and foreseeable loads.
2 02 02
Bubblers and Emitters
2 02 02 01
Bubblers
Bubblers shall be made from UV stabilized plastic, fitted with a flow adjustment and a 12 mm internal
thread. When attached to a lateral or riser this shall be made with a male thread adapter.
Water delivery shall be in an umbrella pattern unless otherwise indicated.
9
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
2 02 02 02
ODAC
Emitters
The operation flow shall be between 0.5 and 1 bar unless otherwise indicated. To operate correctly,
manufacturers recommendation for the maximum particle size filtration shall be followed.
Emitters shall have an adjustable outlet, a built in filter or shall be of self-flushing type to prevent clogging.
2 02 03
Lawn Sprinklers
Shall be fitted with rotary or spray type sprinkler head as indicated; adjustable for individual water flow
and pressure; spray pattern as indicated.
2 02 04
Filters
Unless otherwise indicated, the filter unit and all fittings shall be made of stainless steel and shall be
equipped with a removable top, secured with an O-ring seal or equivalent and a center clamp coupling
with safety latch.
The filtration rate of the filter shall be compatible with the irrigation system flow and pressure.
Each filter unit shall consist of and be supplied with an air valve, two pressure gauges and a bronze plug
drain cock.
The filter element shall consist of stainless steel 3-ply construction, with 6 mesh outer screen, a 4 mesh
inner screen with a 30-mesh screen between. The filter element shall be O-ring sealed to prevent
passage of deleterious material passing the filter.
2 02 05
Controller
The controller shall be designed to automatically open and close control vales, valves operating irrigation
laterals (sprinklers, emitters, bubblers etc.) and filter units or any other special function when indicated.
The controller shall operate at a voltage and cycles (Hertz) available and existent for the Project.
The Controller shall have a 14 day programming capacity to allow the start of a watering cycle at any time
for the 24 hours of the day.
Unless otherwise indicated, the control panel shall have individual stations, each station allowing to be
omitted from the automatic watering cycle if desired, allowing a variable time setting and capable to
operate at least three different valves.
A reset circuit breaker shall protect the controller from damage due to overload or any other
circumstances. All electrical installations shall comply with requirements of Division 16 Electrical.
The controller housing shall be weatherproof, watertight, with lockable access door.
2 02 06
Pumping Units
Unless otherwise indicated, the pumping unit shall consist of two pumps, a membrane tank pre-charged
with air, valves, pressure switches, electric control panel and connecting pipework, all assembled on a
galvanized steel frame, factory assembled and tested ready for installation at site. The second pump will
act as alternative and shall automatically start alteration with the first pump or when the first one fails to
operate normally.
The pumps shall be automatically controlled by means of pressure valves and shall be close coupled,
centrifugal, single or multi-stage type, driven by an electric motor, totally enclosed, fan cooled, squirrel
cage, induction type with permanently lubricated and sealed ball bearings.
Pumps shall be fitted with self-adjusting mechanical seals with carbon rotating face with ceramic seats.
Pump casing shall be made of brass or cast iron. Impeller and shaft shall be made of bronze or stainless
steel.
All electrical installations shall be in compliance with requirements specified in applicable Sections of
Division 16: Electrical.
Switchboards and motor controls shall be of modular construction. Each circuit shall be totally
segregated. Each pump shall be provided with a separate starter.
10
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Safeguards shall be incorporated in pump controls to stop units in the event of loss of suction pressure,
excessive pressure, or unacceptable flow conditions.
The control system shall ensure that unnecessary repeated stopping and starting or speed changes are
avoided.
A separate connection point for a temporary power generator, with switching arrangements, shall be
provided unless otherwise indicated.
2 03 Accessories
2 03 01
Thrust Blocks
Thrust blocks shall be made of concrete having a 28 days compressive strength of at least 10 MPa.
2 03 02
Irrigation Hoses
Each hose point shall consist of a quick coupling valve made of brass or bronze and mounted flush with
ground level and connected to the main or submain water supply. Coupling shall be removable from top
while the valve is under pressure.
Quick coupling valves shall be operated by a 25 mm key, inserted into the valve to give a free flow of
water after a quarter of a turn. Each operating key shall be fitted with a 360 deg. hose swivel, supplied
with a quick coupling device allowing it to be connected to any hose size between 12 m and 40 m when
fitted with a similar coupling.
A 19 mm nylon reinforced PVC hose shall be provided in appropriate length at locations where hose
points are installed.
2 03 04
Maximum particle size of pipe bedding material shall be 19 mm.
Granular material shall be in accordance with BS 882 or an equivalent Standard.
2 04 Water Storage Tanks

2 04 01
Tanks shall be designed and manufactured so that they will not collapse or rupture when subjected to
earth and hydrostatic pressures when the tank is full or empty. Size, placement, and number of openings
shall be taken into consideration.
Unless heavier loads are expected, the minimum live load considered at any part of the tank surface shall
be 14 kPa (300 lb/ft2).
If lifting points are to be provided, they shall be considered in the design and manufacturing of the tank.
All accessories shall be made of non-corrosive materials and shall be permanently connected with noncorrosive fasteners or fittings to the inside of the tank.
A lockable access opening shall be provided to prevent unauthorized entrance.
Necessary provisions shall be made to prevent any harmful water stagnation.
Accessories shall include but not limited to:
01.0 influent and effluent.
02.0 float valve for water level control.
03.0 drain valve.
04.0 overflow (provided with flap valve in underground tanks).
05.0 stilling well.
06.0 access ladder.
11
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
07.0 vent pipes.
2 04 02
Concrete Construction
01.0 Reinforced precast concrete construction, watertight, surface finishes as
indicated minimum concrete compressive strength 28 MPa (4000 psi).
01.1 tank designs, capacity, concrete quality, internal and external waterproofing, etc.
as shown on the drawings or otherwise indicated.
02.0 Reinforced cast-in place construction, watertight, surface finishes as indicated
minimum concrete compressive strength 28 MPa (4000 psi).
02.1 tank designs, capacity, concrete quality, internal and external waterproofing, etc.
as shown on the drawings or otherwise indicated.
12
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Part 3: Execution
Immediately before laying, examine each pipe and joint again for soundness and cleanliness and make
sure that material and surfaces, which form part of a joint, are clean and dry before commencing their
assembly. All defective material shall be replaced.
Check that the position and levels of existing drains and services have been established.
Check that trench lines do not encroach on routes of other services and obstructions.
Check that all equipment is undamaged.
Provide and fix clear stable markers and reference points for lines and levels.
Hand trim excavations to required elevation.
Establish the centerline and width of trenches and locate sprinklers, bubblers, emitters valves, pumps,
etc.
3 03 Installation
3 03 01
General
loading indicated and expected.
Gaskets, seals, sleeves, couplings etc. shall be installed in accordance with manufacturers
recommendations for use of lubricants, solvent cements, glue etc. and other installation requirements.
During installation work, excavations shall be kept free from water, e.g. rainwater, seepage water, spring
water or water from leaks from pipelines. Methods of dewatering shall not affect embedments and
pipelines.
Precaution shall be taken to prevent loss of fine bedding and filling material.
3 03 02
Trench Excavation and Backfilling
See Section 02200 Earthwork unless otherwise indicated.
3 03 03
Bedding and Laying of Irrigation Pipes
3 03 03 01
General
Pipes, joints and connections shall be assembled to withstand the design working pressure for the
pipeline without leakage, internal restriction or obstruction, which may reduce the line capacity below
design requirements.
When steel or other metallic jointing material are used in the line, they shall be adequately protected by
wrapping or coating as recommended by the manufacturer.
Allow heat-fused joints to cool or solvent-cemented joints to cure before moving the pipe and backfilling.
3 03 03 02
Bedding and Laying of Plastic Pipes
Changes in level and line of direction of any pipe shall be limited and shall be gradual enough so that the
bending of the pipe will develop neither excessive diametrical expansion nor excessive bending stress. At
no time shall the pipe be blocked or braced to hold the bend.
When installing pipes with elastomeric seal, flanged joints, or with any connector, which protrudes beyond
the pipe diameter, bell holes shall be provided in the bedding material or trench bottom to permit the pipe
to be continuously supported. After pipe assembly and placement in the trench, each bell hole shall be
filled with bedding material and compacted to attain the same general density as the rest of the bedding.
13
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Where differential settlement may create concentrated loading on a pipe or joint, e.g. at a point of
connection of a buried pipe to a rigid construction, manufacturers recommendation shall be followed to
prevent, or to properly relieve, damaging forces.
When installing piping systems that include joints that are not self restraining (e.g. elastomeric seal type)
thrust blocking shall be provided where line shift or joint separation at system operating pressure can be
anticipated, that is, pump discharge, directional changes, reducers, dead ends and the like. Thrust blocks
cavity shall be excavated and trimmed by hand into undisturbed soil. Before pressurizing the line,
adequate time shall be given for the concrete thrusts to set.
Before backfilling, the pipeline shall be inspected and tested for leaks. When so testing, the pipeline shall
be anchored by placing haunching and initial backfill up to about 150 mm over the pipe, taking care to
leave all joints and fittings exposed for inspection.
For further requirements comply with ASTM F 690 or an equivalent Standard.
3 03 03 03
Installation of above Ground Steel Pipes
See Section 02660 Water Distribution and 15400 Plumbing
3 03 03 04
Line Charging
After piping is installed, but before outlets are installed and backfilling commences, open valves and
flushes the system with full head of water.
With valves at ends and high points open, the pipelines shall be slowly filled with water, limiting the flow
velocity to 0.3 m/s to prevent surge, water hammer or air entrapment.
Ensure that all entrapped air is released from the pipeline while filling.
The pipeline shall be filled but not pressurized until the Engineer is ready to witness or conduct the
pressure test.
3 03 04
Installation of Equipment and Accessories
Install equipment and accessories in compliance with manufacturers recommendations.

Mark valves with neoprene valve marker containing locking device.
For further requirements see Section 02660 Water Distribution and 15400 Plumbing and applicable
Sections of Division 16 Electrical.
3 03 05
Irrigation Water Storage Tanks
See relevant Sections 03300 Cast-in Place Concrete, 03400 Precast Concrete or as indicated otherwise.

3 04 01
General
Initial testing of pipelines may be required by the Engineer before any backfilling is placed. However, for
final acceptance, the pipeline, storage tank and the like shall be tested after backfilling and removal of
sheeting (if any).
3 04 02
Visual Inspection
Carry out general inspections both during progress of works and of the complete installation. These
inspections shall include but not be limited to:
-Checking line and level
-Checking joints
-Checking for damage and deformation of materials
-Checking connections
-Checking corrosion protection of steel parts
-Checking pipes entering or leaving structures
14
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
3 04 03
ODAC
Tests
The line shall be pressurized to 150% of the system design operating pressure, for the time necessary to
check all joints but not less than 1 hour. Any leak found shall be repaired, and the line recharged and retested.
To check the pump performance, the following tests shall be conducted:
-The pump discharge at the duty point shall be measured using either a flow
meter or flow test.
-The operating pressure of the pump unit at the duty point shall be checked by
reading the pressure gauge fitted to the delivery side of the pump unit. The
pressure reading shall be taken in conjunction with the flow rate to make sure
that the correct duty point on the pump characteristic curve is being considered.
-The vacuum gauge on the suction side of the pump unit shall be read to check
that the vacuum being produced by the pump is correct and conforms to the
design data.
-The pump suction shall be checked and tested for air entering any of the joints
or through any of the fittings. Unless otherwise indicated, this shall be done by
applying a soup solution or similar liquid to the suspected leak points.
3 04 04
as required:
-The location of pipeline or other item inspected or tested and the date of the
inspection or test.
-The results
-The personnel involved
3 05 Adjusting and Cleaning

Adjust the control system to achieve time cycles required.
Adjust all head types (sprinklers, bubblers, emitters etc.) for full water coverage as directed.
Make sure that the installed irrigation system is workable, clean and efficient.
3 06 Demonstration
Instruct Employers personnel in the operation and maintenance of the irrigation system and demonstrate
the content of the manuals furnished.
3 07 Protection
Protect completed sections of pipelines and equipment and all other work from damage by construction
traffic and work of other trades.
15
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC

4 01 General
The quantities to be paid for will be measured from approved drawings.
placed.
Bends, branches, adopters and the like will not be measured separately but will be included in the length
of the pipeline measured by linear meter.
For the measurement of excavation and general backfill see Section 02200 Earthwork.
manholes, but over all bends, branches, adopters and the like, giving the depth of the pipeline in depthrange stages.
Water storage tanks, manholes, inspection chambers and the like will be enumerated, indicating type,
size, waterproofing, fittings, accessories and the like.
Manhole covers including frame, cleanouts, etc. will be enumerated, indicating type, material, size etc.
Equipment and accessories e.g. pump units; controller and the like will be enumerated, indicating type,
size, quality, performance criteria etc.
Sprinkler laterals including sprinkler heads, emitters, drippers, bubblers and the like will be enumerated.
Irrigation hoses will be enumerated indicating type and length
16
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC

5 01 General
storage facilities, water, power and for all labour, including samples, mock-ups, cutting and jointing, coordination work with other trades, checking, testing, quality assurance, cleaning and protecting and
including but not limited to ancillary works as indicated below.
No payment will be made for unauthorized operations
Material, products or work, which does not conform to specification requirements, shall be removed and
replaced at Contractors expense.
When a complete structure or unit e.g. a water storage tank, manhole, pump unit and the like is specified
as the unit of measurement, the unit will include all necessary fittings and accessories.

Connections to public mains or other existing piping.
Pipework support e.g. sheeting and the like.
Pipe bedding including hand trimming of trench bottom.
Haunching pipes including side fill and initial backfill.
Concrete foundation of pump units, controller unit or other equipment, which will be floor, mounted.
Thrust blocks.
Corrosion protection of steel or other metallic jointing material.
Preparation of the final design.
Preparation of working and shop drawings
17
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Section 02900 Landscaping
Division
02 - Sitework
Section
02900 Landscaping
Part 1: General
1 01
Summary
performing all operations in connection with landscaping related to building construction.
1 01 01
Section Includes
Section includes:
1 01 04
01.0
Preparation of the ground
02.0
Delivery and planting of trees
03.0
Delivery and planting of shrubs, plants, hedges, groundcover
04.0
Delivery and planting of lawns
05.0
Soil amendments
06.0
Initial maintenance of landscaped areas
Related Sections
02100
02200
02500
02810
Site Preparation
Earthwork
Paving and Surfacing
Irrigation System
1 02
References
1 02 01
1 02 01 04
USA Standards
1 02 01 04 03
American National Standard Organization (ANSI)

ANSI Z 60.1: 90
American Standard for Nursery Stock
1 02 01 05
European Standards
1 02 01 06
British Standards
1 02 02
BS 3882 : 94
Topsoil
BS 3936 : 92
Nursery stock
BS 4043 : 89
Recommendations for transplanting rootballed trees
Codes
BS 4428 : 89
Code of practice for general landscape operations (excluding

hard surfaces)
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
1 03
Definitions
1 03 01
Technical Terms
Aeration - introduction of air into a material.
Climber - plant that requires support to maintain upward growth.
Containerized plant - plant that has been transferred at some stage of
development into a container, and whose roots are not established in a growing
medium.
Container grown plant - plant that has been grown in a container for at least
one growing season.
Cultivating - preparing of ground for, and growing of plants.
Crown - part of the tree or shrub that is composed of branches.
Deciduous tree - tree that sheds it leaves at the end of the growing season.
Digging - turning over the top layer of soil with a spade or fork.
Dressing - applying fresh soil, peat moss, compost, lime or fertilizer to soil or
sward.
Dung - animal dung, well rotted
Fertilizing - addition to soil of products that increase growth and productivity.
Grass - plant community that consists predominantly of the GRAMINEAE family
Ground cover - vegetation that forms a closed covering of low growing
herbaceous or woody vegetation.
Guying - securing a tree or shrub in position by means of ropes or wires.
Landscaping - enhancement of land by means of planting and minor
construction works.
Lawn - area of closely mown sward.
Manure - well rotted animal dung
Manuring - enrichment of soil, usually with manure or other organic substances.
Mowing - cutting grass at regular intervals.
Mulching - applying a layer of organic or other suitable material to the surface
soil to prevent drying out and to minimize weed growth.
Peat moss - finely divided sphagnum peat, completely decomposed and free of
fibers that its biological identity is lost
Perennial plant - plant that lives for several years.
Plant - living member of a vegetable kingdom
Planting - setting of plants in prepared ground
Positive drainage - shape of final grading (as shown in the design or as directed
by the Engineer) which allows an effective dewatering of surface water by means
of falls and crossfalls.
Pruning - removal of unwanted material from a plant by cutting.
Raking - drawing a rake across a surface to remove unwanted material, to fine
level the surface, or to produce a fine tilth.
Raking in - working in with a rake.
Rolling - passing a roller over a surface.
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Root - organ of a plant that absorbs water and mineral salts, does not usually
bears leaves and that usually anchors the rest of the plant.
Root ball - volume of soil retained around the roots of a plant that is being lifted
or transplanted.
Shoot - young branch or sucker of a plant that is new growth.
Shrub - woody plant, usually smaller than a tree.
Sowing - setting of seeds in prepared ground.
Species - group of plants with the same constant and distinctive characteristics,
and the capacity to interbreed amongst themselves.
Spread - average diameter of the top growth.
Staking - supporting a plant in a chosen position by securing to one or more
posts (stakes) or canes driven into the ground.
Subsoil - layer of soil between topsoil and underlaying strata.
Sward - area of short grass that is kept short by mowing or grazing.
Tilling - reducing soil to fine particles
Topsoil - surface layer of soil given fertility by the action of living organism and
the presence of organic matter.
Transplanting - lifting and replanting a plant.
Tree - wooden plant with one or more trunks that usually attains a height of more
than 5 m.
Trunk - main stem of a tree.
Turf - cut piece of continuous layer of sward.
Turfing - laying turfs on prepared ground.
Variety - group of plants that has arisen naturally, that differ in some heritable
characteristics such as form or colour from what is regarded as typical of their
species.
Weed - plant growing where it is not intended to be.
Weeding - destroying weeds by manual, mechanical or chemical means or by
mulchi.
Working in - incorporating additional material into the upper level of soil or into
sward for its improvement.
1 03 02
Abbreviations
Q.C.
1 05
- Quality Control
Submittals
In compliance with conditions of contract, the following shall be submitted

* 01.0 thirty (30) days before landscape works are scheduled to commence.
1 05 01
Product Data
Plant procurement schedule, which identifies the source of every plant species, listed on drawings or
elsewhere in the project documents.
Certificate of origin confirming the origin, sizes, and age of plant, including botanical and common name
of each type and species.
Health certificate for all imported material.
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Maintenance instructions and schedule.

Manufacturers product information for each material delivered, including certified analysis for fertilizer
and soil amendments.
Certificate of origin for each grass seed mixture required, stating botanical and common name,
percentages of weight, percentages of purity, and germination.
Planting schedule indicating dates for each type of landscape work, working within seasonal limitations.
1 05 03
Samples
The following samples shall be submitted to the Engineer:
1 05 04
01.0
Top soil (0,25m3)
02.0
Planting soil mix (0,25 m3)
03.0
Tree stakes (one); guying wire (500 mm); rubber or plastic hose (100
mm).
04.0
Trees, shrubs, plants, etc. (one)
05.0
Hedges, groundcover, etc. (as required by the Engineer)

Documented experience of Contractors site supervisor.
Documented qualification and experience of the laboratory/agency.
Records and reports of Contractors internal Q.C.
Records and reports of Contractors external Q.C.
1 05 06
Other Submittals
Certificates of compliance ref. 1 06 03
1 06
Quality Assurance
year) including corrective actions taken by the contractor if necessary.
Reports and records shall be available for assessment to the Engineer not later than three (3) days after
testing and checking.
Reports and records shall be established and maintained in a manner to ensure traceability.
indicated.
1 06 01
Qualifications
Contractors supervisor responsible for landscape operations shall have at least five (5) years of
experience in this field, shall be familiar with the referenced standards and horticultural practices and
shall have successfully completed work similar in material, design and extent to that work indicated for
the Project.
1 06 03
Certifications
Certificates of compliance, issued by an independent agency/laboratory, and not more than 12 month old,
indicating that any material proposed by the Contractor meets or exceeds the referenced standards shall
be submitted by the Contractor prior to execution of any work.
4
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
1 06 04
Internal and External Quality Control
1 06 04 01
Contractors internal Quality Control shall include but not be limited to the following:
Checking existing grading for compliance with lines and levels required for the
Project prior to commencing landscape operations.
Checking suppliers certificates prior to first delivery.
Checking suppliers delivery tickets to comply with supply order and specification
for each delivery.
Checking proper storage of materials at least every two (2) weeks
1 06 04 02
The Contractor shall employ and pay for a qualified independent testing laboratory/agency which will
supervise quality control procedures carried out by the Contractor and perform its own sampling,
checking, and testing services before and during landscaping operations in accordance with referenced
standards, specifications, and horticultural practice.
The laboratory/agency shall be approved by the Engineer.
All checking and testing by the laboratory/agency shall be properly documented and submitted to the
Engineer within tree (3) days after checking and testing.
1 07
Delivery, Storage, and Handling
1 07 01
The Engineer shall be notified in writing at least one week in advance of the time and manner of delivery
of plants.
All packaged materials shall be delivered in their original containers showing weight, analysis, and name
of manufacturer and shall be protected from deterioration during transport and delivery and while stored
at site.
All plant materials, which are not true to name and do not comply with specifications or are rejected by
the Engineer, shall be immediately removed from the site.
1 07 02
Container-grown stocks shall not be removed from containers until planting time.
Trees and shrubs shall be delivered to the site when preparations for planting have been completed and
shall be planted immediately. If planting is delayed more than 6 hours after delivery, trees and shrubs
shall be set in shade, protected from weather and mechanical damage, and roots shall be kept moist by
covering with mulch, burlap or other acceptable means of retaining moisture.
Trees and shrubs shall not be pruned prior to delivery unless otherwise approved by the Engineer and
shall not be bend or bind-tie in such a manner as to damage bark, break branches, or destroy natural
shape. Balled and burlaps trees shall not be dropped during delivery.
Grass turfs shall be delivered so that they will be placed within 24 hours after stripping and shall be
protected against drying and breaking. Soil amendments like fertilizer, peat moss, shredded bark, manure
and organic resin, or others shall be delivered in their original unopened containers. In lieu of containers,
soil amendments shall be produced and delivered in bulk with a certificate indicating product name,
manufacturers name, and chemical analysis.
1 08
Project- and Site Conditions
Existing underground utilities in areas of landscape operations shall be located by the Contractor.
5
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
If utilities or structures are indicated, adequate means of support and protection shall be provided during
landscape operations.
If uncharted or incorrectly charted piping or other utilities are encountered, the utility operator shall be
consulted immediately for directions.
Damaged utilities or structures shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the utility operator and the Engineer
or paid for the costs to repair any damages which may result from any of the Contractors operations
during the Contract and maintenance period.
Existing utility serving facilities occupied by the Employer shall not be interrupted during occupied hours,
except if permitted in writing by the Engineer and when acceptable temporary utilities have been provided
by the Contractor.
1 08 02 01
Dust Control
Dust caused by Contractors operations on and near work shall be controlled by use of all means
necessary.
1 08 02 02
Pollution Prevention
Necessary precautions shall be taken to prevent pollution of ground with fuel, oil, chemicals or other
harmful materials.
1 09
Schedules and Programs
Utility lines, if any, shall be scheduled prior to ground preparation and planting
Trees and shrubs shall be planted when final grades are established and prior to planting of lawn unless
otherwise directed by the Engineer.
1 10
Special Warranty
Warranty may extend the general warranty period required for the project.
1 11
Maintenance
1 11 01
Maintenance Services
1 11 01 01
General
Maintenance shall begin immediately after planting for a period of 12 month after provisional handing
over.
1 11 01 02
Plant Replacement
Replacements shall be made of any trees, plants, or grassed areas, which, in the opinion of the Engineer,
are dead or in unhealthy or unsightly condition or have lost their natural shape due to dead branches,
excessive pruning or inadequate or improper maintenance.
Replacements shall be carried out at the end of the first growing season following the end of the
maintenance period if required by the Engineer.
In case of the latter one, an additional inspection will be conducted by the Engineer at the end of this
extended maintenance period, if any, to determine acceptance or rejection.
Replacements shall be continued until all previously noted deficiencies have been corrected.
All areas damaged by replacement operations shall be restored to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
6
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Part 2: Products
2 01
Soils
2 01 01
Fill Materials under Landscaped Areas
(See section 02200 EARTHWORK)
2 01 02
Topsoil
Topsoil shall be of uniform quality and composition and free of stones, rocks, lumps, clods, roots, debris,
and any other deleterious matter which may be harmful to plant growth and shall be capable of producing
agriculture crops.
01.0
The silt content shall not exceed 15%.
02.0
The pH-value shall range between 6,5 - 8,4.
03.0
The sodium absorption ratio shall not exceed 12.
04.0
The electrical conductivity shall not exceed 7 milli Ohms per centimeter
05.0
The Exchangeable Sodium Percentage (E.S.P.) shall not exceed 10%.
A soil analysis by an independent soil laboratory/agency employed and paid for by the Contractor shall
determine any nutrient deficiencies or harmful excesses together with appropriate recommendations for
soil improvements and after-care in compliance with recognized horticultural practice.
Any deficiency in topsoil shall be corrected by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
2 01 03
Planting Soil Mix
Unless otherwise indicated planting soil shall consist of a uniform mixture (by volume) of the following
components:
For trees:
-4/5 parts of topsoil
-1/5 part peat moss
-Manure mixed at a rate of 10% by volume to 90% of topsoil and peat moss.
Other soil amendments shall be as recommended by a soil analysis
For Shrubs, Groundcovers and Climbers:
-4/5 parts of topsoil
-1/5 part of peat moss
-Manure mixed at a rate of 5% by volume to 95% mixture of topsoil and peat
moss.
Other soil amendments shall be as recommended by a soil analysis.
2 02
Soil Amendments
2 02 01
Sweet Sand
Sweet sand shall be from an approved source, and shall be free of weeds, stones, and other foreign
matter and shall have the following characteristics:
7
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
See Annex 6 / Table 1

Sweet sand shall be tested by an independent soil laboratory/agency.
2 02 02
Fertilizer
Fertilizer shall be commercial balanced fertilizer of neutral characteristics, including some elements
derived from organic sources and containing the following percentages of available plant nutrients.
For trees and shrubs with not less than 5% total nitrogen, 10% available phosphoric acid, and 5% soluble
potash.
For lawns with percentage of nitrogen required to provide not less 0,48 kg of actual nitrogen per 100 m2 of
lawn area and not less than 4% phosphoric acid and 2% potash. Nitrogen shall be available in a form that
will be available to lawn during initial period of growth; at least 50% shall be in organic form.
2 02 03
Sawdust
Sawdust shall be rotted; free of chips, stones, sticks, soil, or toxic substances and with 4,5 kg of nitrogen
uniformly mixed into each cubic meter sawdust.
2 02 04
Lime
Lime shall contain not less than 85% of total carbonates with a minimum of 30% magnesium carbonates.
2 02 05
Peat Moss
Peat moss shall be homogenous and completely decomposed sphagnum peat, free of hard lumps and
with a pH-range suitable for the intended use. The consistency shall be so that the peat can be passed
through a 12,5 mm mesh.
The pH-value shall range between 3,5 - 6,0.
2 02 06
Manure
Manure shall be well-rotted, unbleached animal-dung, free of diseases and not containing more than 25%
by volume of straw, sawdust, or other bedding materials.
Manure shall be from an approved source.
2 03
Plant Material
All plant material shall be procured -if available- from an approved source within Egypt.
All plant material shall be of size, genus, and species as shown in drawings, plant lists, specification, or
other project documents.
All plant material shall be available in a nursery at least three (3) months prior to the required planting
season.
Plants shall have developed root systems, shall be free of insects and diseases as well as mechanical
injuries and be suitable for field planting.
Plants shall be true in botanical name and one plant of each lot shall be tagged with name and size.
Except for palm trees, planting season shall be between September and March.
2 03 01
Trees
Trees shall be balled and burlaps. Container grown trees shall comply with ANSI Z60.1 for container
stock.
8
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
2 03 02
ODAC
Shrubs
Shrubs shall be balled and burlaps or container grown subject to specified limitations of ANSI Z60.1 for
container grown stock and shall be of height as indicated and with not less than minimum number of
canes required by ANSI Z 60.1 for type and height of shrub required.
2 03 03
Vines and Climbers
Vines and climbers shall be container grown and shall be of height as indicated and with not less than
minimum number of canes required by ANSI Z 60.1 for type and height of plant.
2 03 04
Ground Cover
Ground covers shall be established and well rooted in removable containers or integral peat pots with not
less than minimum number and length of runners required by ANSI Z60.1 for pot sizes as indicated.
2 04
Palm Trees
Palm trees shall be

* 01.0 balled, burlaps and drumlaced or / and
* 02.0 containerized
According to Engineers approval.
2 05
Grass Material
Grass shall be healthy turf stolons

According to Engineers approval
2 06
Miscellaneous Materials
2 06 01
Tree Stakes and Guys
Tree stakes shall be

01.0 from wood free of knot holes or other defects, min. dia. 50 mm and of length
as indicated in the tree stake schedule. (See Annex 6 / Table 2)
02.0
min. 32 mm dia. galvanized steel pipes and of length as indicated in the
tree stake schedule and / or to Engineers approval
Wire ties and guys shall be 2-strand, twisted, galvanized iron wires, not less than 3 mm thick, with hot
dipped galvanized turnbuckles.
Rubber or plastic hoses, cut to required length, uniform colour, material and size shall be used to protect
tree trunks from damage by wire.
Wire ties and guys for palm tress shall be 7-strand, twisted, galvanized iron wires, individual strands not
less than 3 mm thick, with hot-dipped galvanized turnbuckles.
2 06 02
Wound Dressing
Wound dressing shall be bitumen based tree paint.
2 06 03
Tree Wrapping Tape
Wrapping material shall be double thickness, heavy kraft crepe paper designed for this purpose.
2 06 04
Filtration Fabric
Filtration Fabric shall be permeable non-woven 75% polypropylene, 25% nylon, min. weight 70 g/m2, and
minimum thickness 0,3 mm unless otherwise specified.
9
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
2 06 05
ODAC
Plant Labels
Plant labels shall be durable and legible stating the correct botanical and common plant name, in weather
resistant ink or embossed process, attached securely to plants but not restricting growth.
2 06 06
Mulch
Organic mulch shall be free from deleterious materials and suitable for top dressing of plants and shall
consist of shredded hardwood, ground or shredded bark, or wood chips.
2 06 07
Anti-desiccant
Anti-desiccant shall be emulsion type, film-forming agent designed to permit transpiration, but retard
excessive loss of moisture from plants.
Anti-desiccant shall be delivered in manufacturers original, fully identified containers and shall be mixed
according to manufacturers instructions.
2 06 06
Herbicides, Fungicides and Insecticides
Shall be of an approved manufacturer and suitable for the intended use.
2 06 09
Gravel Blanket for Erosion Control
Gravel shall be washed gravel or crushed stone, free of loam, sand, clay, or other foreign matters, max.
grain size 50 mm.
10
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
Part 3: Execution
3 01
General Examination
Prior to the commencement of planting, all vegetation areas shall be tested for toxicity and salinity by an
independent soil laboratory/agency.
Inspection and testing shall be carried out to a depth of at least 500 mm below topsoil to determine the
nature of the subsoil. If levels recommended by the soil analysis are exceeded, they shall be corrected by
heavy manual leaching or other appropriate measures to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Further periodic
testing shall be performed at least every six (6) month throughout the contract and maintenance period.
3 02
General Preparation
3 02 01
General
All areas to be landscaped shall be cleared of all trash, stumps, debris, weeds etc. and disposed off site.
All areas to be planted with grass, plants, ground covers and shrubs shall be scarified and loosened by
means of hand or tractor mounted equipment to a depth of 150 mm and a positive surface drainage shall
be established following the existing grading as much as possible. Where needed the area shall be
reworked to establish a positive drainage away from all paving unless otherwise specified or directed by
the Engineer.
Finished grading shall be established to allow all vegetation areas to be 25 mm below paving, curbs and
edgings.
Individual tree and shrub locations shall be laid out and marked.
3 02 02
Preparation of Subsoil
See Section 02200 Earthwork
3 02 03
Preparation of Planting Soil Mix
Before mixing, topsoil shall be cleaned of roots, plants, sods, stones, clay lumps and all other extraneous
materials harmful or toxic to plant growth.
Topsoil and peat moss and soil amendments shall be thoroughly mixed in proportions as specified under
Part 2: Products.
Further soil amendments shall be added as recommended by the soil analysis.
3 02 04
Preparation for Planting Lawns
Areas to receive lawn shall be excavated to a depth of at least 150 mm.

A mixture of 4/5 parts sweet sand and 1/5 part peat moss shall be filled in excavated areas thoroughly
mixed to a depth of at least 100 mm.
Fertilizer and soil amendments shall be applied at a rate as recommended by the soil analysis.
The surface shall be roto-tilled to a homogenous mixture of fine texture to a depth of at least 100 mm.
Subsequently, the surface shall be floated and raked to an even grade. All stones larger than 50 mm,
lumps, clods and other extraneous matter shall be removed and a positive surface drainage shall be
established and allow for grassed areas to be 25 mm below paving, curbs and edgings.
3 02 05
Preparation of Planting
Beds of 200-250 mm of soil shall be excavated and removed and replaced by planting soil mix.
The bottom of planting bed areas shall be loosened to a minimum depth of 150 mm and stones larger
than 50 mm in any direction, sticks, rubbish, and other extraneous materials shall be removed.
11
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC
1/2 of total amount of planting soil mix shall be placed and worked into the top of loosened subgrade to
create a transition layer, then the remainder of the planting soil shall be placed.
Prepared beds shall be scarified not less than 200 mm deep and mixed with soil amendments and
fertilizer as recommended by a soil analysis.
For planters, a layer of gravel not less than 100 mm thick shall be placed on the bottom of planters with a
filtration/separation fabric and filled with planting soil mix to an elevation 25 mm below top of the planter
after final settlement.
Planting soil mix shall be mixed with soil amendments and fertilizer as recommended by a soil analysis.
3 02 06
Excavation for Trees, Shrubs, and Groundcover
Pits, beds and trenches shall be excavated with vertical sides and with bottom of excavation slightly rise
at center to provide drainage.
For balled and burlaps stock, excavation shall be at least twice as wide as the ball diameter and equal to
the ball depth plus allowance for setting of ball on a 100 mm thick layer of planting soil mix.
For container grown stock, excavation shall be as specified for balled and burlaps stock, adjusted to size
of container width and depth.
For root bare stock, excavation shall be at least 250 mm wider than the root spread and deep enough to
allow for setting of roots on a 100 mm thick layer of planting soil mix.
Subsoil removed from plant
excavation shall be disposed off site and shall not be mixed with planting soil or used as backfill.
All excavations shall be filled with water to percolate out immediately prior to planting.
3 03
Planting
3 03 01
Planting Trees, Shrubs and Groundcover
3 03 01 01
Balled and Burlaps Stock
Balled and burlaps stock shall be set plumb and in center of pit or trench on a layer of planting soil mix
with top of ball at same elevation as adjacent finished landscape.
Then, additional planting soil mix shall be placed around base and sides of the ball and each layer shall
be worked to settle and eliminate voids and air pockets.
When excavation is approximately 2/3 filled, backfill shall be thoroughly watered prior to placing of
remainder of backfill.
Final layer of planting soil mix shall be watered in the same way after placing
After planting, a temporary watering basin shall be built-up around the base of each tree and shrub.
3 03 01 02
Container Grown Stock
Container grown stock shall be set as specified for balled and burlaps stock, except containers shall be
removed immediately prior to planting.
3 03 01 03
Bare Root Stock
Injured roots shall be cut clean prior to planting.

Bare root stock shall be set on a 100 mm thick layer of planting soil mix without bending, doubling,
tangling or turning roots.
Planting soil mix shall be spread by hand carefully around the roots and puddled with water until layers of
backfill are saturated.
After planting, a temporary watering basin shall be built-up around the base of each tree and shrub.
12
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
3 03 01 04
ODAC
Planting Palm Trees
Before planting, the fronds shall be pruned, bound together and protected by jute cloth for one year.
Palm trees shall be set centrally to the pit with their collar positioned 25-50 mm below adjacent surfaces.
Planting soil mix shall be carefully placed as specified for balled and burlaps stock.
Palm trees planted in paved areas shall receive a 100 mm gravel topping, filled up to 200 mm below
adjacent paving unless otherwise indicated.
Planting season shall be summer, preferably between May and June.
3 03 01 05
Staking and Guys
Stakes shall be driven before planting and shall penetrate at least 60 cm below the base of the planting
pit.
All trees and shrubs shall be staked and/or guyed as indicated in Part 2: Products.
3 03 02
Planting Lawn
Healthy turf stolons of 01.0

Bermuda grass (Cynadon Dactylon) shall be used as basis to the grass
sward and shall be oversawn by suitable heat tolerant perennial rye-grass in October/November.
Turf stolons shall be laid on the prepared moistured planting bed, working from planks set over previously
laid turfs and shall be firmed into position in consecutive rows with broken joints (stretcher bond) closely
butted; turf edges and margins shall be laid with whole turf stolons.
As work progresses, gaps in joints shall be filled with fine peat moss, working from planks.
Any irregularities in finished levels shall be adjusted by raking out and/or additional filling of planting bed.
Watering shall take place immediately after planting to keep the turf and the planting bed moist for at least
4-6 weeks and shall be carried out with sprinklers, perforated hose pipes or oscillating sprays to avoid
washing soil out of the joints.
If shrinkage occurs, any open joint shall be filled with fine peat moss brushed in and subsequently
watered.
Planting season shall be spring time unless otherwise indicated.
3 03 03
Pruning
Trees, shrubs and groundcover shall be pruned, thinned out, and shaped in accordance with horticultural
practice. Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, tree leaders shall not be cut. From flowering trees, if
any, only injured or dead branches shall be removed.
After pruning, trees shall retain required height and spread. Excessively and misformed stock resulting
from improper pruning shall be removed and replaced. All pruning shall preserve the natural character of
plants.
Only clean, sharp and proper professional tools shall be used for pruning.
Cuts over 25 mm in diameter shall be painted with wound dressing.
3 03 04
Mulching
All pits, trenches and planted areas shall be covered with mulch .
3 03 05
Spraying
Anti-desiccant shall be applied to provide an adequate film over trunks, branches, stems, twigs and
foliage.
If deciduous trees or shrubs are moved when in full leaf, they shall be sprayed with anti-desiccant at
nursery before moving and again two (2) weeks after planting.
13
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
3 05
ODAC
Adjusting and Cleaning
During landscape work and special warranty period, all paving shall be kept clean and work area in
orderly condition.
3 07
Protection
All landscape work and materials shall be protected from damage due to landscape operations,
operations by other trades, and trespassers.
All landscape work shall be protected from erosion.
All protection shall be maintained during landscape work and special warranty period.
14
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC

4 01
General
The quantities to be paid will be measured from drawings.

Measurement of plant height will begin at the ground line and continued to where the main part of the
plant ends; not to the tip of a thin shoot.
Where work is measured by area (m2), no deductions will be made for voids and openings not exceeding
1 m2 .
Palm and trees are to be measured by trunk length according to specifications and bill of quantities. All
measurements are to be taken above ground. Tree diameters specified are to be measured 15 cm above
ground.
4 02
Units of Measurement
Preparing finished grading will be measured by area (m2).

Placing planting soil mix in planters shall be measured by area indicating thickness of layers.
Planting grass will be measured by area (m2).
Planting trees, shrubs, vines and climbers, and groundcovers will be enumerated, indicating height and
average spread.
Maintenance will be measured as lump sum indicating duration (in month) of special warranty period.
15
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC

5 01
General
Payment will be in full compensation for excavation, hauling and placing materials, including all labour,
plant, equipment, tools, traffic control, cleaning, protection, certifying and testing, quality assurance, and
all other operations to perform the work, including but not limited to the following ancillary works.
Maintenance shall include watering, cultivating, pruning, mulching, fertilizing, weed control, removal of
dead material, spraying against insect borne disease and all other work to keep landscaped areas in
healthy growing condition.
Maintenance to planted areas shall include adjusting, tightening and repairing guys and stakes, resetting
trees and shrubs to proper grades and vertical position where required, restoring or replacing damaged
wrapping.
Maintenance to grassed areas shall include mowing, trimming, aeration, and other operations such as
rolling, re-grading, replanting, re-seeding to establish a smooth, acceptable lawn, free of eroded or bare
areas.
Material, which is unnecessarily wasted or otherwise misused, shall be replaced at Contractors expense.
No payment will be made for quantities resulting from oversize or unauthorized excavation, filling and
grading, or other unauthorized operations.
5 02
Ancillary Works to be included in the Unit Rate
Contracting an independent soil laboratory/agency to perform external quality control.

Contractor shall train Employer's personnel during maintenance period according to a yearly schedule of
work.
Contractor shall measure soil salinity and PH values monthly and perform remedial activities if necessary.
Stockpiling any excavation or filling for later re-use on site.
Stockpiling plants in a temporary nursery on site.
The unit rate for planting trees, shrubs, vines and climbers and groundcovers shall include excavating,
preparing the bed, backfilling planting soil mix, watering, fertilizing, soil amendments, staking and guying,
spraying, mulching, pruning and any other operations necessary in compliance with horticultural practice
and referenced standards.
The unit rate shall include all supply, installation, operations, material necessary for best completion of
work together with one year maintenance period and guarantees as specified for each section.
The unit rate for planting grassed areas shall include excavating the planting bed, preparing the planting
bed, laying of turfs, re-seeding, watering and any other operation necessary in compliance with
horticultural practice and referenced standards.
The unit rate for preparing finished grading shall include cultivating and establishing a positive drainage.
16
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
ODAC

6 01
Tables
Table 1: Sweet Sand
pH
6,0 - 7,5
Electrical Conductivity
less than 2500 micro mhos saturated extract
Free carbonates
Less than 0,5% air dried soil
Chlorides
Less than 800 ppm in saturation extract
Sulphates
Less than 15% in neutral saturation extract
Exchangeable Sodium
Less than 0,2% in neutral normal ammonium extract
Magnesium
25 - 100 ppm in 1,5% ammonium nitrate extract when

1/2 hour shaken
Physical characteristics
Sand 0,05 - 2,0 mm
80% minimum
Silt 0,002 - 0,05 mm
15% maximum
Clay less than 0,002 mm
5% maximum
Table 2: Tree Stake Schedule

Tree Height (mm)
Stake Quantity
Stake Length (mm)
Single Trunk
Up to 1500
2500
1500 - 2000
3000
2000 - 3000
4000
over 3000
Use guy wires
Multi Trunk
up to 1500
2500
1500 - 2000
3000
2000 - 3000
.3
4000
over 3000
Use guy wires
All palm trees
Use guy wires
17
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
L30
L30
ODAC
STAIRS/ LADDERS/ WALKWAYS/ HANDRAILS/ BALUSTRADES

To be read in conjunction with General Requirements.
PRELIMINARY INFORMATION/ REQUIREMENTS
110
130
-
DESIGN
Design standard: to BS 5395 where applicable:
Completion of design: Finalize details to meet structural and safety requirements
of BS 5395.
Type of activity/ occupancy category to BS 6399-1: category B.
SITE DIMENSIONS
Procedure: Before starting work on designated items take site dimensions, record
on shop drawings and use to ensure accurate fabrication.
COMPONENTS
270
-
PRECAST STAIRS
Precast stair units to engineers details
110
-
ALUMINUM EXTRUSIONS TO EXTERNAL STAIR ENCLOSURES

Support structure: Precast/Insitu stair case to engineers details .
Extrusion section: 25x100mm and 25x75mm sections as required for spans and
provide varied surface finish.
Finish: Metallic Polyester Powder coating.
- Colour: From metallic range TBC.
Fixings: Fixings to each landing and ring beam at head to form irregular cage
around stair enclosure. Max spacing of vertical elements 125mm spacings.
Additional requirements: Size and strength of vertical rails to be checked and
designed to resist horizontal forces and allow handrail fixings.
550
-
570
-
BALUSTRADES ELEVATED WALKWAYS

Component material, grade and finish as delivered:
- Guarding: Horizontal tension wire fixed between 50x25mm Stainless steel
RHS posts fixed to top of slab. Horizontal wires at max 100mm ctrs.
- Handrails: 50mm Stainless steel tube
Workmanship:
- Metalwork: As section Z11
Fixing: 100mm circular steel plate fixed to concrete landing.
HANDRAILS TO STAIRS
Component material, grade and finish as delivered:
- Handrails: 50mm Stainless steel
- Brackets: L Shape Stainless steel fixed to wall
Workmanship:
- Metalwork: As section Z11 .
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
L30
ODAC
INSTALLATION
640
-
FIXING GENERALLY
Fasteners and methods of fixing: To section Z20.
Structural members: Do not modify, cut, notch or make holes in structural
members, except as indicated on drawings.
Temporary support: Do not use stairs, walkways or balustrades as temporary
support or strutting for other work.
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Q20
ODAC
GRANULAR SUB-BASES TO ROADS/ PAVINGS
Q20 GRANULAR SUB-BASES TO ROADS/ PAVINGS

110
-
THICKNESSES OF SUB-BASE/ SUBGRADE IMPROVEMENT LAYERS

Thicknesses: See sections: See Q25/215 Concrete Flag Paving.
120
-
CHECKING CALIFORNIA BEARING RATIO (CBR) OF SUBGRADES

Subgrade variation: If material appears to vary from that stated in the site
investigation report, or if there are extensive soft spots, test subgrade CBR to BS
1377-4 or BS 1377-9. Submit results and obtain instructions before proceeding.
130
-
HERBICIDES
Herbicide: Suitable for suppressing perennial weeds.
Application: To subgrade of Q25/215 .
140
-
EXCAVATION OF SUBGRADES
Final excavation to formation/ subformation level: Carry out immediately before
compaction of subgrade.
Soft spots and voids: Give notice.
Wet conditions: Do not excavate or compact when the subgrade may be
damaged or destabilized.
145
-
PREPARATION/ COMPACTION OF SUBGRADES

Timing: Immediately before placing sub-base.
Compaction: Thoroughly, by roller or other suitable means, adequate to resist
subsidence or deformation of the subgrade during construction and of the
completed roads/ pavings when in use. Take particular care to compact fully at
intrusions, perimeters and where local excavation and backfilling has taken place.
170
-
GEOTEXTILE FILTER/ SEPARATOR MEMBRANES

Jointing: 300mm overlap.
Protected from:
- Exposure to light, except during laying (maximum five hours).
- Contaminants.
- Materials listed as potentially deleterious by geotextile manufacturer.
- Damage, until fully covered by fill.
- Wind uplift, by laying not more than 15 m before covering with fill.
Preparation: Humps and sharp projections removed and hollows filled before
laying.
200
-
205
-
SUBGRADE IMPROVEMENT LAYER (CAPPING)

Material: To Highways Agency Specification for highway works, table 6/1, Class
6F1, 6F2 or 6F3.
Standard: Placed and compacted to Highways Agency Specification for highway
works, table 6/1, clauses 612 and 613.3, 613.8, 613.9, 613.10 and 613.13.
HIGHWAYS AGENCY TYPE 2 GRANULAR MATERIAL
Material: To Highways Agency Specification for highway works, clause 804
(Type 2) or approved equivalent.
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Q20
210
211
-
ODAC
CBR (minimum): 30% as clause 804.3.

Testing (if required): As clause 804.6.
HIGHWAYS AGENCY TYPE 1 GRANULAR MATERIAL
Material: Highways Agency Specification for highway works, clause 803 (Type 1)
or approved equivalent.
Testing (if required): As clause 803.5.
GRANULAR MATERIAL
Quality: Free from excessive dust, well graded, all pieces less than 75 mm in any
direction, minimum 10% fines value of 50 kN when tested in a soaked condition
to BS 812-111, and in any one layer only one of the following:
- Crushed rock (other than argillaceous rock) or quarry waste with not more
binding material than is required to help hold the stone together.
- Crushed concrete, crushed brick or tile, free from plaster, timber and metal.
- Crushed non-expansive slag.
- Gravel or hoggin with not more clay content than is required to bind the
material together, and with no large lumps of clay.
- Well-burned non-plastic colliery shale.
- Natural gravel.
- Natural sand.
Filling: Spread and levelled in 150 mm maximum layers, each layer thoroughly
compacted.
220
-
FROST SUSCEPTIBLE GRANULAR MATERIAL

Definition: To Highways Agency Specification for highway works clause 801.17.
Limitations: Do not use within 450 mm of the final surface of the paving.
Testing: Test materials used if required and supply certificates.
225
-
SULFATE CONTENT
Slag and other granular materials placed within 500 mm of cement-bound
materials, concrete pavements, structures or products: To Highways Agency
Specification for highway works clause 801.2.
230
-
PLACING GRANULAR MATERIAL GENERALLY

Preparation: Loose soil, rubbish and standing water removed.
Structures, membranes and buried services: Ensure stability and avoid damage.
250
-
LAYING GRANULAR SUB-BASES FOR PEDESTRIAN AREAS

General: Spread and levelled.
Compaction:
- Timing: As soon as possible after laying.
- Method: By roller or other suitable means, adequate to resist subsidence or
deformation of the sub-base during construction and of the completed paving
when in use. Take particular care to compact fully at intrusions, perimeters and
where local excavation and backfilling has taken place.
310
-
ACCURACY
Permissible deviation (maximum) from required levels, falls and cambers:
Footways
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Q20
320
-
ODAC
Subgrade
Recreation areas
20 mm
Sub-base
+ 12 mm.
BLINDING
Locations: Surfaces to receive sand bedded interlocking brick or block paving to
sections Q24 and Q25.
Material: Sand, fine gravel, PFA or other approved.
Finish: Close, smooth, compacted surface.
330
-
COLD WEATHER WORKING

Frozen materials: Do not use.
Freezing conditions: Do not place fill on frozen surfaces. Remove material
affected by frost. Replace and recompact if not damaged after thawing.
340
-
PROTECTION
Sub-bases: As soon as practicable, cover with subsequent layers, specified
elsewhere.
Subgrades and sub-bases: Prevent damage from construction traffic,
construction operations and inclement weather.
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Q25
ODAC
SLAB/ BRICK/ SETT/ COBBLE PAVINGS
Q25 SLAB/ BRICK/ SETT/ COBBLE PAVINGS

GENERAL
105
-
MATERIAL SAMPLES
Samples representative of colour and appearance of designated materials:
Submit before placing orders.
- Designated materials: As clause Q25/215 .
125
-
ADVERSE WEATHER
Temperature: Do not lay or joint paving if the temperature is below 3C on a
falling thermometer or below 1C on a rising thermometer.
Frozen materials: Do not use. Do not lay bedding on frozen or frost covered
bases.
Paving with mortar joints and/ or bedding: Protect from frost damage, rapid drying
out and saturation until mortar has hardened.
Stockpiled bedding sand: Protect from saturation.
Exposed areas of sand bedding and uncompacted areas of sand bedded paving:
Protect from heavy rainfall.
Saturated sand bedding: Remove and replace, or allow to dry before proceeding.
Laying dry-sand jointed paving in damp conditions: Brush in as much jointing
sand as possible. Minimize site traffic over paving. As soon as paving is dry, top
up joints and complete compaction.
130
-
CEMENTITIOUS BASES AND SUB-BASES

General: Protect from moisture loss, if not covered by another pavement course
within 2 hours of completion.
135
-
CONDITION OF SUB-BASES/ BASES BEFORE LAYING BEDDING COURSE

Trenches and excavation of soft or loose spots in subgrade: Filled and
compacted as specified.
Granular surfaces: Sound, clean, smooth and close-textured enough to prevent
migration of bedding materials into the sub-base during compaction and use, free
from movement under compaction plant and free from compaction ridges, cracks
and loose material.
Prepared existing and new bound bases (roadbases): Sound, clean, free from
rutting or major cracking and cleared of sharp stones, projections or debris.
Sub-base/ Roadbase level tolerances: To BS 7533-7, Annex A.
Levels and falls: Accurate and within the specified tolerances.
Drainage outlets: Within 0 to -10 mm of the required finished level.
Features in sand bedded paving (including mortar bedded restraints and drainage
ironwork): Completed, to required levels, and adequately bedded and haunched
in mortar that has reached sufficient strength.
Cementitious sub-bases: Cured for the minimum times specified in BS 7533-4,
clause 4.5.3.
155
-
GEOTEXTILE SHEET
Manufacturer and material as clause Q20/170
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Q25
184
-
188
-
192
196
-
ODAC
Usage: As required by contractor.

Lap by 300 mm and joint by 150 mm
Location: Immediately below sand bedding course.
Laying: Fit neatly at edge restraints and other features that interrupt sand bedding
course, e.g. drainage fittings, channels, manholes and kerbs.
Edge detail: Turn sheet up to form an upstand against features, height not less
than thickness of sand bedding.
LAYING PAVINGS
Cutting: Cut units cleanly and accurately, without spalling, to give neat junctions
with edgings and adjoining finishes.
Lines and levels of finished surface: Smooth and even, with falls to prevent
ponding.
Bedding of units: Firm so that rocking or subsidence does not occur or develop.
Slopes: Lay paving units upwards from the bottom of slopes.
Appearance: Even and regular with even joint widths and free of mortar and sand
stains.
LEVELS OF PAVING
Permissible deviation from specified levels:
- Generally: 6 mm.
Height of finished paving above features:
- At gullies: +6 to +10 mm.
- At drainage channels and kerbs: +3 to +6 mm.
REGULARITY
Maximum variation in gap under a 3 m straight edge placed anywhere on the
surface (where appropriate in relation to the geometry of the surface): 10 mm.
Sudden irregularities: Not permitted.
Difference in level between adjacent blocks/ pavers/ setts (maximum): 2 mm.
PROTECTION
Cleanliness: Keep paving clean and free from mortar droppings, oil and other
materials likely to cause staining.
Materials storage: Do not overload pavings with stacks of materials.
Handling: Do not damage paving unit corners, arrises, or previously laid paving.
Mortar bedded pavings: Keep free from traffic after laying:
- Pedestrian traffic: For 4 days (minimum).
Access: Restrict access to paved areas to prevent damage from site traffic and
plant.
SLAB/ FLAG PAVING
215
-
CONCRETE FLAG PAVING TO PATHWAYS

Granular sub-base: As clause Q20/ 210 .
- Thickness: 150 mm.
Bedding: 50 mm as clause 255.
- Nominal thickness: 25 mm.
Flags: To BS 7263-1.
- Colour/ Finish: To be determined
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Q25
235
-
245
-
255
-
280
-
ODAC
- Nominal sizes: 450 x 450 x 50 mm.

Jointing: Sand as clause 280.
- Bond: Half lap staggered.
CUTTING CONCRETE FLAGS
General: Cleanly and accurately, without spalling.
- Visible surfaces: Do not mark or damage.
Notches cut from corner of flag exceeding 25% of flag area: Mitre cut remaining
shape from internal corner of notch to opposite external corner.
Diagonal mitre cutting: Cut flags or portions of flags to form a mitre at abrupt
changes of level at the ends of ramped footpath crossings and the like.
SAND FOR BEDDING
Type: Naturally occurring clean sharp sand, graded as for laying course sand to
BS 7533-4, table 4.
Purity: Free from deleterious salts, contaminants and cement.
Procurement: Obtain from one source and ensure consistent grading.
Moisture content: Maintain even moisture content that will give maximum
compaction. Sand squeezed in the hand should show no free water and start to
exhibit cracking when pressure is released.
SAND BEDDING
Bedding sand: As clause 245.
Laying and compacting to specified final thickness: Vibrating plate as BS 7533-4,
table 1. Loosen the top 10 mm using a rake; alternatively, screed out a further 10
mm of loose sand.
Bedding materials: Do not deliver to working area over uncompacted paving.
Bedding course prepared area: 1 m (minimum) to 3 m (maximum) in advance of
laying face, and 1 m (maximum) at end of working period.
Protection of prepared bedding course: Do not allow traffic or leave exposed. Fill,
rescreed and recompact areas disturbed by removal of screed rails or trafficking.
Lay paving units immediately.
Supply of slabs/ flags to laying face: Over newly laid paving but stack at least 1 m
back from laying face.
NARROW SAND FILLED JOINTS FOR SAND BEDDED PAVING
Jointing sand: Clean dried sand, graded as for jointing sand to BS 7533-4, table 4
and free from deleterious salts, contaminants and cement.
Placing slabs/ flags: Squarely with minimum disturbance to bedding. Lay away
from previously laid slabs/ flags.
Joint width: 2-5 mm. Do not use mechanical force to obtain tight joints.
Jointing:
- Timing: On the same day as laying and when rain is not expected.
- Jointing: Brush clean dry sand over joints, then bed down slabs/ flags using
plate vibrator to BS 7533-4, clause 6.9.4.
- Completion: Refill joints with sand and revibrate until joints are completely
filled. Repeat if jointing sand settles during early trafficking.
Vacuum cleaning machines: Do not use.
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Q25
335
-
ODAC
MORTAR POINTED JOINTS

Jointing material: Cement mortar as section Z21, mix 1:3 semidry cement:sand to
BS 882, grading limit M. .
Timing: When the surface of the paving is dry and rain is not expected.
Jointing: Carefully and thoroughly fill joints. Tool to smooth bucket handle profile
2-3 mm below slab/ flag surface. Clean mortar from face of slabs/ flags before it
sets.
Protection: Protect from rain.
4
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Q28
ODAC
TOPSOILING
Q28 TOPSOILING
120
-
SITE INVESTIGATION
Investigate to confirm details of existing soil types.
200
-
GRADING SUBSOIL
General: Grade to smooth flowing contours to achieve specified finished levels of
topsoil.
Areas of thicker topsoil: Excavate locally.
250
-
310
-
SUBSOIL SURFACE PREPARATION

General: Excavate and/ or place fill to required profiles and levels, as section
D20.
Loosening:
- Light and noncohesive subsoils: When ground conditions are reasonably dry,
loosen thoroughly to a depth of 300 mm.
- Stiff clay and cohesive subsoils: When ground conditions are reasonably dry,
loosen thoroughly to a depth of 450 mm.
- Rock and chalk subgrades: Lightly scarify to promote free drainage.
Stones: Immediately before spreading topsoil, remove stones larger than 50mm.
Other items: Remove arisings, contaminates and debris.
PREPARATION OF UNDISTURBED TOPSOIL
General: Prepare areas to receive soft landscaping as necessary to ensure that
the topsoil is in a suitable state for cultivation operations specified in sections Q30
and/ or Q31.
Hard ground: Break up thoroughly. Remove roots and boulders.
Areas covered with turf or thick sward: Plough or dig over to full depth of topsoil.
Fallow period:
- After preparation leave for not less than two months.
- Weed control: At appropriate times treat with an approved herbicide to prevent
seeding of weeds..
335
-
SURPLUS TOPSOIL TO BE REMOVED

Generally: Remove from site.
370
-
SAMPLE LOAD OF IMPORTED TOPSOIL

General: Deliver to site a sample load of not less than 5 m.
Give notice: Allow inspection before making further deliveries to site. Retain for
comparison with subsequent loads.
- Notice period: two working days.
380
-
CONTAMINATION
General: Do not use topsoil contaminated with subsoil, rubbish or other materials
that are:
- Corrosive, explosive or flammable.
- Hazardous to human or animal life.
- Detrimental to healthy plant growth.
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Q28
410
-
420
-
450
-
ODAC
TOPSOILING
Subsoil: In areas to receive topsoil, do not use subsoil contaminated with the
above materials.
Give notice: If any evidence or symptoms of soil contamination are discovered on
the site or in topsoil to be imported.
HANDLING TOPSOIL
Aggressive weeds: Give notice and obtain instructions before moving topsoil.
Plant: Select and use plant to minimize disturbance, trafficking and compaction.
Contamination: Do not mix topsoil with:
- Subsoil, stone, hardcore, rubbish or material from demolition work.
- Other grades of topsoil.
Multiple handling: Keep to a minimum. Use topsoil immediately after stripping.
Wet conditions: Handle topsoil in the driest condition possible. Do not handle
during or after heavy rainfall or when it is wetter than the plastic limit defined by
BS 3882, Annex N2.
SPREADING TOPSOIL
Temporary roads/ surfacing: Remove before spreading topsoil.
Layers:
- Depth (maximum): 150 mm.
- Gently firm each layer before spreading the next.
Depths after firming and settlement (minimum): 150mm for grassed areas and
450mm for shrubbed areas.
Crumb structure: Do not compact topsoil. Preserve a friable texture of separate
visible crumbs wherever possible.
FINISHED LEVELS OF TOPSOIL AFTER SETTLEMENT
Above adjoining paving or kerbs: 30mm.
Below dpc of adjoining buildings: Not less than 150mm.
Shrub areas: Higher than adjoining grass areas by 30mm.
Within root spread of existing trees: Unchanged.
Adjoining soil areas: Marry in.
Thickness of turf or mulch: Included.
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Q30
ODAC
SEEDING/TURFING
Q30 SEEDING/TURFING
GENERAL INFORMATION/REQUIREMENTS
115
-
SEEDED AND TURFED AREAS

Growth and development: Healthy, vigorous grass sward, free from the visible
effects of pests, weeds and disease.
Appearance: A closely knit, continuous ground cover of even density, height and
colour.
120
-
CLIMATIC CONDITIONS
General: Carry out the work while soil and weather conditions are suitable.
145
-
WATERING
Quantity: Wet full depth of topsoil.
Application: Even and without displacing seed, seedlings or soil.
Frequency: As necessary to ensure the establishment and continued thriving of
all seeding/turfing.
150
-
WATER RESTRICTIONS
Timing: If water supply is or is likely to be restricted by emergency legislation do
not carry out seeding/turfing until instructed. If seeding/turfing has been carried
out, obtain instructions on watering.
160
-
NOTICE
Give notice before:
- Setting out.
- Applying herbicide.
- Applying fertilizer.
- Preparing seed bed.
- Seeding or turfing.
- Visiting site during maintenance period.
Period of notice: three working days.
170
-
SETTING OUT
Boundaries of seeding/turfing areas: Mark clearly.
PREPARATION
205
-
PREPARATION MATERIALS
General: Free from toxins, pathogens or other extraneous substances harmful to
plant, animal or human life.
Certified materials: For each of the following materials submit a certificate giving
supply source, content analysis, confirmation of suitability for purpose and
confirmation of absence of harmful substances.
- Give notice before ordering or using.
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Q30
ODAC
SEEDING/TURFING
210
-
HERBICIDE FOR GENERAL USE

Type: Suitable for suppressing perennial weeds.
212
-
SEED BED CLEANING BEFORE SOWING FOR GRASS AREAS

Operations: remove all weeds anf their seeds.
231
PEAT
Peat or products containing peat: Do not use.
250
-
CULTIVATION
Compacted topsoil: Break up to full depth.
Tilth: Reduce top 100 mm of topsoil to a tilth suitable for blade grading (10 mm
down particles).
Material brought to the surface: Remove stones and clay balls larger than 50 mm
in any dimension, roots, tufts of grass, rubbish and debris.
260
-
270
-
280
-
290
-
GRADING
Topsoil condition: Reasonably dry and workable.
Contours: Smooth and flowing, with falls for adequate drainage. Remove minor
hollows and ridges.
Finished levels after settlement: 25 mm above adjoining paving, kerbs, manholes
etc.
Blade grading: May be used to adjust topsoil levels provided depth of topsoil is
nowhere less than 150mm.
Give notice: If the required levels cannot be achieved by movement of the
existing soil.
FERTILIZER FOR GRASSED AREAS
Types: Apply both:
- Superphosphate with a minimum of 18% water soluble phosphoric acid.
- A sulfate of ammonia with a minimum of 20% nitrogen.
Application: Before final cultivation and three to five days before seeding/turfing.
Coverage: Spread evenly, each type at 70 g/m, in transverse directions.
FINAL CULTIVATION
Timing: After grading and fertilizing.
Seed bed: Reduce to fine, firm tilth with good crumb structure.
- Depth: 25 mm.
- Surface preparation: Rake to a true, even surface, friable and lightly firmed but
not over compacted.
- Remove surface stones/earth clods exceeding:
General areas: 38mm.
Fine lawn areas: 25 mm.
Adjacent levels: Extend cultivation into existing adjacent grassed areas sufficient
to ensure full marrying in of levels.
PREPARATION FOR HYDRAULIC SEEDING
Clearance: Remove rubbish, and stones exceeding 25mm in any dimension.
Herbicide: Kill pernicious weeds using a selective hormone herbicide, and other
weeds using a selective contact herbicide.
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Q30
ODAC
SEEDING/TURFING
General: Grade to smooth, flowing levels and carry out as much basic cultivation
as possible to ensure that grass roots can penetrate into the substrate.
Finished surface: Ribbed or rough textured.
Other requirements: SEEDING
310
-
GRASS SEED FOR GENERAL GRASS AREAS

Mixture: A1 mix or similar and approved.
Rate of application: 35g/m.
320
-
QUALITY OF SEED FOR GENERALLY:

Freshness: Use seed produced for the current growing season.
Certification: Use blue label certified varieties to EC purity and germination
regulations and the Department for Environment, Food and Rural Affairs Higher
Voluntary Standard. When requested, submit an Official Seed Testing Station
certificate of germination, purity and composition.
Samples of mixtures: Submit when requested.
330
-
SOWING
General: Establish good seed contact with the root zone to promote healthy,
consistent growth.
Method: To suit soil type, proposed usage of grassed area, location and weather
conditions during and after sowing.
340
-
PRE-EMERGENT HERBICIDE FOR FOR GRASSED AREAS GENERALLY:

General: Where soil has not been allowed to lie fallow apply a suitable preemergent herbicide immediately after sowing.
352
-
EDGES TO SEEDED AREAS

Location: Planting beds and around newly planted trees.
Timing: After seeded areas are well established.
Edges: Cut to clean straight lines or smooth curves. Draw back soil to permit
edging.
Arisings: Remove.
PROTECTING/CUTTING
530
590
-
FIRST CUT OF GRASSED AREAS

Timing: When grass reaches 75mm high and is reasonably dry.
Preparation: Before cutting, remove debris, litter, and stones and earth clods
larger than 25 mm in any dimension.
Height of first cut: 30mm.
Arisings: to be removed from site.
CLEANLINESS
Soil and arisings: Remove from hard surfaces.
General: Leave the works in a clean, tidy condition at Completion and after any
maintenance operations.
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Q30
ODAC
SEEDING/TURFING
MAINTENANCE
605
-
MAINTENANCE
Duration: Carry out the operations in clauses 610 to 685 from completion of
seeding/turfing until or as instructed by the CA.
610
-
FAILURES OF SEEDING/TURFING
General: Grassed areas that have failed to thrive (unless due to theft or malicious
damage), during the period stated in clause 605, will be regarded as defects due
to materials or workmanship not in accordance with the Contract. Make good by
recultivation and reseeding/returfing.
Timing of making good: Submit proposals.
620
680
-
MAINTAINING GRASS AREAS:

Maximum height of growth at any time: 75mm.
Preparation: Before each cut remove all litter and debris.
Cutting: As and when necessary to a height of 30mm.
- Arisings: to be removed from site.
Trimming: At the time of each cut, trim all grass edges, including round the base
of trees, manholes, etc. and remove arisings.
Weed control: Keep the sward substantially free of broad leaved weeds by
applying a suitable selective herbicide.
Watering: in accordance with clause 145.
FERTILIZER FOR GENERAL GRASS AREAS:
March application: 15:10:10 Spring turf fertilizer at 35 g/m.
September application: 5:10:10 Autumn turf fertilizer at 50 g/m.
4
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Q31
ODAC
EXTERNAL PLANTING
Q31 EXTERNAL PLANTING

GENERAL INFORMATION/ REQUIREMENTS
112
-
SITE CLEARANCE
General: Remove rubbish, concrete, metal, glass, decayed vegetation and
contaminated topsoil.
Stones: Remove those with largest dimension exceeding 38mm.
Contamination: Substances injurious to plant growth including subsoil, rubble,
fuel, and lubricants.
Vegetation: in areas shown in drawings using suitable non-residual herbicide
approved by CA.
Large roots: Grub up and dispose of without undue disturbance of soil and
adjacent areas.
118
-
SOIL CONDITIONS
Soil for cultivating and planting: Moist, friable and not waterlogged.
Frozen or snow covered soil: Give notice before planting. Provide additional root
protection. Prevent planting pit sides and bases and backfill materials from
freezing.
120
-
CLIMATIC CONDITIONS
General: Carry out the work while soil and weather conditions are suitable. Do not
plant during periods of frost or strong winds.
125
-
TIMES OF YEAR FOR PLANTING

Deciduous trees and shrubs: Late October to late March.
Conifers and evergreens: September/ October or April/ May.
Herbaceous plants (including aquatic and marginal): September/ October or
March/ April.
Container grown plants: At any time if ground and weather conditions are
favourable. Ensure that adequate watering and weed control is provided.
Dried bulbs, corms and tubers: September/ October.
Colchicum (crocus): July/ August.
Green bulbs: After flowering in spring.
Wildflower plugs: Late August to mid November or March/ April.
130
-
MECHANICAL TOOLS
Restrictions: Do not use within 100 mm of tree and plant stems.
145
-
WATERING
Quantity: Wet full depth of topsoil.
Application: Even and without damaging or displacing plants or soil.
Frequency: As necessary to ensure establishment and continued thriving of
planting.
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Q31
ODAC
EXTERNAL PLANTING
150
-
WATER RESTRICTIONS
General: If water supply is or is likely to be restricted by emergency legislation, do
not carry out planting until instructed. If planting has been carried out, obtain
instructions on watering.
160
-
NOTICE
Give notice before:
- Setting out.
- Applying herbicide.
- Applying fertilizer.
- Delivery of plants/ trees.
- Planting shrubs.
- Planting trees into previously dug pits.
- Watering.
- Visiting site during maintenance period.
Period of notice: 2 working days.
165
-
200
-
PREPARATION, PLANTING AND MULCHING MATERIALS

General: Free from toxins, pathogens or other extraneous substances harmful to
plant, animal or human life.
Certified materials: For each of the following materials submit a certificate giving
supply source, content analysis, confirmation of suitability for purpose and
confirmation of absence of harmful substances: Mulch.
- Give notice before ordering or using.
PLANTS/ TREES - GENERAL
Condition: Materially undamaged, sturdy, healthy and vigorous.
Appearance: Of good shape and without elongated shoots.
Hardiness: Grown in a suitable environment and hardened off.
Health: Free from pests, diseases, discoloration, weeds and physiological
disorders.
Budded or grafted plants: Bottom worked.
Root system and condition: To requirements of National plant Specification and
balanced with branch system.
Species: True to name.
Origin/ Provenance: to be approved by the CA.
Origin and Provenance have the meaning given in the National Plant
Specification.
215
PLANTS/ TREES - SPECIFICATION CRITERIA

Name, forms, dimensions, provenance and other criteria: As scheduled and
defined in the National Plant Specification.
216
PLANTS/ TREES - SPECIFICATION CRITERIA

Name, forms, dimensions and other criteria: To the relevant part of BS 3936.
235
-
CONTAINER GROWN PLANTS/ TREES

Growing medium: With adequate nutrients for plants to thrive until permanently
planted.
Plants: Centred in containers, firmed and well watered.
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Q31
245
-
ODAC
EXTERNAL PLANTING
Root growth: Substantially filling containers, but not root bound, and in a condition
conducive to successful transplanting.
Hardiness: Grown in the open for at least two months before being supplied.
Containers: With holes adequate for drainage when placed on any substrate
commonly used under irrigation systems.
LABELLING AND INFORMATION
General: Provide each plant/ tree or group of plants/ trees of a single species or
cultivar with supplier's labelling for delivery to site, showing:
- Full botanical name.
- Total number.
- Number of bundles.
- Part bundles.
- Supplier's name.
- Employer's name and project reference.
- Plant specification, in accordance with scheduled National Plant Specification
categories.
Additional information: Submit on request: additional stock information to the CA.
246
LABELLING AND INFORMATION

Standard: To BS 3936.
250
SUPPLY OF PLANTS/ TREES

Suppliers: Members of the Horticultural Trades Association Nursery Certification
Scheme.
260
-
PLANT/ TREE SUBSTITUTION

Plants/ trees unobtainable or known to be likely to be unobtainable at time of
ordering: Submit alternatives, stating:
- Price.
- Difference from specified plants/ trees.
Further alternatives: Proposed substitutions may not be acceptable and
submission of further alternatives may be required.
Approval: Obtain before making any substitution.
265
-
270
-
PLANT/ TREE HANDLING, STORAGE AND TRANSPORT

Standard: To CPSE Handling and establishing landscape plants (obtainable
from the Horticultural Trades Association) Part I, Part II and Part III, paragraphs
1.3.3 to 1.3.6, 3.0, and 4.0.
Frost: Protect plants/ trees from frost.
Handling: Handle plants/ trees with care. Protect from mechanical damage and
do not subject to shock, e.g. by dropping from a vehicle.
Plant packaging: Coextrudedpolyethylene bags wirth black interiors ans white
exteriors
Packaging of bulk quantities: may use pallets or bins sealed with polyethylene
and shrink wrapping.
PLANTING GENERALLY
Standard: To CPSE Handling and establishing landscape plants (obtainable
from the Horticultural Trades Association) Part III, paragraphs 6.2 to 6.6.
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Q31
280
-
ODAC
EXTERNAL PLANTING
Appearance: Plant upright or well balanced with best side to front.

TREATMENT OF TREE WOUNDS
Cutting: Keep wounds as small as possible.
- Cut cleanly back to sound wood using sharp, clean tools.
- Leave branch collars. Do not cut flush with stem or trunk.
- Set cuts so that water will not collect on cut area.
Fungicide/ Sealant: Do not apply unless instructed.
285
-
PROTECTION OF EXISTING GRASS

General: Protect areas affected by planting operations using boards/ tarpaulins.
Do not place excavated or imported materials directly on grass.
290
-
SURPLUS MATERIAL
General: Remove subsoil, stones, debris, wrapping material, canes, ties,
temporary labelling, prunings and other arisings/ rubbish.
PREPARATION OF PLANTING BEDS/ PLANTING MATERIALS

300
-
HERBICIDE
Locations: planting beds generally.
General: Prevent weeds from seeding and perennial weeds from becoming
established, by applying a suitable herbicide.
- Delay cultivation as recommended by manufacturer.
305
-
WEED CONTROL
Locations: planting beds generally.
General: Prevent weeds from seeding and perennial weeds from becoming
established, by applying a suitable herbicide.
315
-
LIME
Locations: as directed by CA.
Composition: Fine ground limestone containing not less than 50% of CaO
equivalent.
Application: Spread evenly.
- Timing: Immediately before cultivation.
- Coverage: rate as determined by pH test immediately before cultivation.
341
-
PEAT
Peat or products containing peat: Do not use.
357A SOIL AMELIORANT/ CONDITIONER

- Locations: to planting beds generally.
- Type: one of the following
Composted bark, cocoa shell or coir.
Manure well rotted horse or farmyard dung but not poulty or pig manure.
Mushroom compost spent mushroom beds containing only well rotted
manure, peat. chalk and residual mushroom growth.
4
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Q31
ODAC
EXTERNAL PLANTING
375
-
385
-
Leaf mould well rotted broad leaves from deciduous trees but not ash,
popular or sycamore leaves.
Otherwell rotted organic material subject to CA approval.
Coverage: 1m3 of material, per 15m2.
Timing: Apply prior to cultivation.
CULTIVATION
Compacted topsoil: Break up to full depth.
Cultivation: Loosen, aerate and break up soil into particles of 2 - 8 mm.
- Depth: Top 300mm of planting beds.
- Timing: Within a few days before planting.
- Weather and ground conditions: Suitably dry.
Surface: Leave regular and even.
Levels:
- As required in sections D20 and Q28.
- Within 30mm of levels specified on drawings.
Undesirable material brought to the surface: Remove, including weeds, roots,
stones and clods larger than 50 mm in any dimension, tufts of grass and foreign
matter.
Soil within root spread of trees and shrubs to be retained: Do not dig or cultivate.
MULCH MATTING/ GEOTEXTILE FABRIC
Manufacturer: Contractors choice.
- Product reference: - Type/ size: Timing: Lay before planting.
Watering: Water soil thoroughly before laying.
Laying: In close contact with soil surface. Lap or butt joints as recommended by
manufacturer, with no gaps.
Planting: Cut neat slits or flaps. Refit closely around plant stems.
Overlay: gravel to be agreed with CA.
PLANTING TREES
505
-
535
-
TREE PITS
Sizes: bush, whip and small feathers 600mm diax 450mm deep. Standatd and
large feathers trees 900mm dia x 600mm deep. Tall standard trees 1200mm dia x
750mm deep. Advanced Hursery stock 2100mm dia x 1000mm deep.
Sloping ground: Maintain horizontal bases and vertical sides with no less than
minimum depth throughout.
Pit bottoms: With slightly raised centre. Break up to a depth of 150mm
Pit sides: Scarify.
Additional requirements: Backfilling material: as clause 486.
Accessories: STAKING GENERALLY
Stakes: Softwood, peeled chestnut, larch or oak, free from projections and large
or edge knots and with pointed lower end.
5
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Q31
555
-
ODAC
EXTERNAL PLANTING
- Preservative treatment: Nails: To BS 1202-1, galvanized, minimum 25 mm long and with 10 mm diameter
heads.
Minimum stake sizes: 2m x 70mm dia
SHORT SINGLE STAKING FOR STANDARD TREES:
Staking: Position stake close to tree on windward side and drive vertically at least
300 mm into bottom of pit before planting. Consolidate material around stake
during backfilling.
Height of stakes: Cut to approximately 600 mm above ground level.
Ties: Tying: Secure tree firmly but not rigidly to stake with rubber tie within 25 mm of
top of stake.
586
-
BACKFILLING MATERIAL
Composition: Previously prepared mixture of topsoil excavated from pit and
additional topsoil as required, together with:
- Ameliorant/ Conditioner: compost/soil conditioner/ameliorant
Coverage: 1 part material to 10 parts topsoil.
- Fertilizer: 4: 10:18.5 NPKMg
Coverage: 60g per tree.
590
-
MULCHING TREES
Material: conifer bark.
- Purity: Free of pests, disease, fungus and weeds.
Preparation: Clear all weeds. Water soil thoroughly.
Coverage: 500mm radius at 1m3 material per 10m2
PROTECTING/ MAINTAINING/ MAKING GOOD DEFECTS

710
720
-
740
-
MAINTENANCE
Duration: Carry out the operations in the following clauses from completion of
planting until 12 months or as instructed by thwe CA.
Frequency of maintenance visits: Monthly during growing season.
FAILURES OF PLANTING
General: Plants/ trees/ shrubs that have failed to thrive (unless due to theft or
malicious damage after completion) during period stated in clause 710, will be
regarded as defects due to materials or workmanship not in accordance with the
Contract. Replace with equivalent plants/ trees/ shrubs.
Replacements: To match size of adjacent or nearby plants of same species or
match original specification, whichever is the greater.
Timing of making good: to be agreed with CA.
CLEANLINESS
Soil and arisings: Remove from hard surfaces and grassed areas.
General: Leave the works in a clean tidy condition at Completion and after any
maintenance operations.
6
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
Q31
750
-
755
-
ODAC
EXTERNAL PLANTING
PLANTING MAINTENANCE GENERALLY

Weed control: Maintain weed free area around each tree and shrub, minimum
diameter the larger of 1 m or the surface of original planting pit.
- Keep planting beds clear of weeds, by hand weeding.
Planted areas: Fork over beds as necessary to keep soil loose, with gentle
cambers and no hollows. Take care not to reduce depth or effect of mulch.
Precautions: Ensure that trees and shrubs are not damaged by use of mowers,
nylon filament rotary cutters and similar powered tools.
Staking: Check condition of stakes, ties, guys and guards. Replace broken or
missing items. Adjust if necessary to allow for growth and prevent rubbing of
bark. Cut back any damaged bark.
- Frequency of checks: 2 months.
Trees: Spray crown when in leaf during warm weather. Carry out in the evening.
PLANTING MAINTENANCE - FERTILIZER
Time of year: March or April.
Fertilizer: - Manufacturer: Contrctors choice.
- Product reference: Application: Evenly spread, carefully incorporating below mulch materials.
Coverage: 60gms per feathered, standard or large tree. 30gms per transplant
760
-
PLANTING MAINTENANCE - PRUNING

General: Prune at appropriate times, to remove dead or dying and diseased wood
and suckers, to promote healthy growth and natural shape.
- Prune trees to favour a single central leading shoot.
765
-
PLANTING MAINTENANCE - WATERING

General: As clauses 145.
780
-
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
General: Before end of the period stated in clause 710, submit printed
instructions recommending procedures to be established by the Employer for
maintenance of the planting work for one full year:
790
-
FINAL MULCHING
Timing: At end of the period stated in clause 710.
Watering: Ensure that soil is thoroughly moistened prior to remulching, applying
water where necessary.
Planting beds: Remulch as clause 485.
Coverage: 1m3 of material per 20m2.
Trees: Remulch as clause 590.
Coverage: 1m3 of material per 10m2
7
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
R10
ODAC
RAINWATER PIPEWORK/GUTTERS
TYPE(S) OF PIPEWORK/GUTTER
250
-
370
-
PVC-U PIPEWORK FOR INTERNAL USE:

Pipes, fittings and accessories: To BS 4514, Kitemark certified.
Manufacturer Contractor to provide details.
Nominal size(s): 110mm diameter.
Colour: Grey
Accessories: bends, offsets and access covers.
Method of jointing: ring seal with some solvent weld.
Method of fixing: plastic brackets plugged and screwed to masonry
RAINWATER OUTLETS TO SINGLE LAYER POLYMERIC SHEET COVERING
TO WARM ROOFS
Roof construction: Single layer polymeric warm roof construction as section J42.
Roof insulation thickness: 50 mm at drainage points.
Manufacturer: Contractor to provide details.
Outlet reference: load bearing application.
Type of grate: Secured dome, polycarbonate.
Outlet: Type and direction to suit pipework with adaptors and connections
recommended for the purpose by outlet manufacturer.
Accessories: Underdeck clamp
Bonded insulation jacket
Spigot adaptor (solvent weld socket)
Method of fixing: To manufacturers recommendations to suit in situ concrete
screeded roof construction.
INSTALLATION
400
-
410
-
BEFORE COMMENCING WORK specified in this section, ensure that:

Below ground drainage is ready to receive rainwater or that the discharge can be
dispersed by approved means to prevent damage or disfigurement of the building
fabric.
Any specified painting of surfaces which will be concealed or inaccessible is
completed.
INSTALLATION GENERALLY:
Install pipework/gutters to ensure the complete discharge of rainwater from the
building without leaking.
Obtain all components for each type of pipework/guttering from the same
manufacturer unless specified otherwise.
Provide access fittings and rodding eyes as necessary in convenient locations to
permit adequate cleaning and testing of pipework.
Avoid contact between dissimilar metals and other materials which would result in
electrolytic corrosion.
Do not bend plastics or galvanized steel pipes.
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
R10
ODAC
Adequately protect pipework/gutters from damage and distortion during

construction. Fit purpose made temporary caps to prevent ingress of debris. Fit
all access covers, cleaning eyes and blanking plates as the work proceeds.
Where not specified otherwise use plated, sherardized, galvanized or nonferrous
fastenings, suitable for the purpose and background, and compatible with the
material being fixed.
415
BUILDERS WORK: Comply with restrictions on the cutting of holes, chases,

notches, etc. and methods of attachment to the building fabric specified in section
P31.
450
-
RAINWATER OUTLETS: Ensure that:

Outlets are securely fixed before connecting pipework.
Junctions between outlets and pipework can accommodate all movement in the
structure and pipework.
460
-
FIXING PIPEWORK:
Fix securely at specified centres plumb and/or true to line.
Make changes in direction of pipe runs only where shown on drawings unless
otherwise approved.
Fix branches and low gradient sections with uniform and adequate falls to drain
efficiently.
Fix externally socketed pipes/fittings with sockets facing upstream.
Provide additional supports as necessary to support junctions and changes in
direction.
Fix every length of pipe at or close below the socket collar or coupling.
Provide a load bearing support for vertical pipes at not less than every storey
level. Tighten fixings as the work proceeds so that every storey is self supporting
and undue weight is not imposed on fixings at the base of the pipe.
Isolate from structure where passing through walls or floors and sleeve pipes as
specified in Section P31.
Provide for thermal and building movement when fixing and jointing, and ensure
that clearances are not reduced as fixing proceeds.
Fix expansion joint pipe sockets rigidly to the building and elsewhere use fixings
that allow the pipe to slide.
465
-
JOINTING PIPEWORK/GUTTERS:
Joint using materials, fittings and techniques which will make effective and
durable connections.
Joint differing pipework/gutter systems with adaptors recommended by
manufacturer(s).
Cut ends of pipes to be clean and square with burrs and swarf removed. Chamfer
pipe ends before inserting into ring seal sockets.
Ensure that jointing or mating surfaces are clean, and where necessary
lubricated, immediately before assembly.
Form junctions using fittings intended for the purpose ensuring that jointing
material does not project into bore of pipes, fittings and appliances.
Remove surplus flux/solvent/cement/sealant from joints.
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
R10
ODAC
490
PIPEWORK WITH UNSEALED JOINTS: Ensure that pipes are firmly secured to
prevent rattling at joints and fixings.
515
-
INTUMESCENT COLLARS:
Pipeline nominal size(s): 110 mm
Fire rating: 1 hour
Fixing: As required by manufacturer. Do not use fixings incorporating plastics
materials.
Fit tightly and accurately to structure and pipe to ensure maintenance of the
specified fire resistance. Fill gaps between collar and structure and/or pipe with
intumescent material recommended by the collar manufacturer.
525
-
INSULATION TO INTERNAL PIPELINES/GUTTERS:

Material: Mineral wool insulation
Manufacturer and reference: Contractors choice
Thickness(es): 60 mm
Fire performance: Class 1 spread of flame when tested to BS 476:Part 7.
Fit insulation as required by manufacturer.
Fix securely and neatly, ensuring continuity at supports and leaving no gaps. Fix
split pipe insulation with the split on blind side of pipeline.
Do not fit insulation until completion of testing.
530
IDENTIFICATION OF INTERNAL RAINWATER PIPEWORK: To BS 1710 using

self-adhesive bands or identification clips located at junctions, at both sides of
each slab, bulkhead and wall penetration, and elsewhere as directed.
540
-
ACCESS FOR TESTING AND MAINTENANCE:

Install pipework and gutters with adequate clearance to permit testing, cleaning
and maintenance.
Position access fittings and rodding eyes so that they are not obstructed by other
pipework, framing, etc.
550
561
-
570
TESTING GENERALLY:
Inform CA sufficiently in advance to give him a reasonable opportunity to observe
tests.
Check that all sections of installation are free from obstruction and debris before
testing.
Provide clean water, assistance and apparatus for testing as required.
Carry out tests as specified. After testing, locate and remedy all defects without
delay and retest as instructed.
Keep a record of all tests and provide a copy of each to the CA.
INTERNAL PIPEWORK TEST:
Temporarily seal open ends of pipework with plugs.
Connect a U tube water gauge and air pump via a plug.
Pump air into pipework until gauge registers 50 mm.
Allow a period for temperature stabilization, after which the pressure of 50 mm is
to be maintained without loss for not less than 5 minutes.
GUTTER TEST: Block all outlets, fill gutters to overflow level and after 5 minutes
closely inspect for leakage.
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
R10
590
-
ODAC
IMMEDIATELY BEFORE HANDOVER:

Remove construction rubbish and debris from all roofs and gutters. Where
possible, sweep and remove fine dust which may enter rainwater systems. Do not
sweep or flush dust or debris into the rainwater system.
Remove swarf, debris and temporary caps from the entire rainwater installation.
Ensure that all access covers, rodding eyes, outlet gratings, etc. are secured
complete with all fixings.
4
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
R10
ODAC
TYPE(S) OF PIPEWORK/GUTTER
250
-
370
-
PVC-U PIPEWORK FOR INTERNAL USE:

Pipes, fittings and accessories: To BS 4514, Kitemark certified.
Manufacturer Contractor to provide details.
Nominal size(s): 110mm diameter.
Colour: Grey
Accessories: bends, offsets and access covers.
Method of jointing: ring seal with some solvent weld.
Method of fixing: plastic brackets plugged and screwed to masonry
RAINWATER OUTLETS TO SINGLE LAYER POLYMERIC SHEET COVERING
TO WARM ROOFS
Roof construction: Single layer polymeric warm roof construction as section J42.
Roof insulation thickness: 50 mm at drainage points.
Manufacturer: Contractor to provide details.
Outlet reference: load bearing application.
Type of grate: Secured dome, polycarbonate.
Outlet: Type and direction to suit pipework with adaptors and connections
recommended for the purpose by outlet manufacturer.
Accessories: Underdeck clamp
Bonded insulation jacket
Spigot adaptor (solvent weld socket)
Method of fixing: To manufacturers recommendations to suit in situ concrete
screeded roof construction.
INSTALLATION
400
-
410
-
BEFORE COMMENCING WORK specified in this section, ensure that:

Below ground drainage is ready to receive rainwater or that the discharge can be
dispersed by approved means to prevent damage or disfigurement of the building
fabric.
Any specified painting of surfaces which will be concealed or inaccessible is
completed.
INSTALLATION GENERALLY:
Install pipework/gutters to ensure the complete discharge of rainwater from the
building without leaking.
Obtain all components for each type of pipework/guttering from the same
manufacturer unless specified otherwise.
Provide access fittings and rodding eyes as necessary in convenient locations to
permit adequate cleaning and testing of pipework.
Avoid contact between dissimilar metals and other materials which would result in
electrolytic corrosion.
Do not bend plastics or galvanized steel pipes.
1
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
R10
ODAC
Adequately protect pipework/gutters from damage and distortion during

construction. Fit purpose made temporary caps to prevent ingress of debris. Fit
all access covers, cleaning eyes and blanking plates as the work proceeds.
Where not specified otherwise use plated, sherardized, galvanized or nonferrous
fastenings, suitable for the purpose and background, and compatible with the
material being fixed.
415
BUILDERS WORK: Comply with restrictions on the cutting of holes, chases,

notches, etc. and methods of attachment to the building fabric specified in section
P31.
450
-
RAINWATER OUTLETS: Ensure that:

Outlets are securely fixed before connecting pipework.
Junctions between outlets and pipework can accommodate all movement in the
structure and pipework.
460
-
FIXING PIPEWORK:
Fix securely at specified centres plumb and/or true to line.
Make changes in direction of pipe runs only where shown on drawings unless
otherwise approved.
Fix branches and low gradient sections with uniform and adequate falls to drain
efficiently.
Fix externally socketed pipes/fittings with sockets facing upstream.
Provide additional supports as necessary to support junctions and changes in
direction.
Fix every length of pipe at or close below the socket collar or coupling.
Provide a load bearing support for vertical pipes at not less than every storey
level. Tighten fixings as the work proceeds so that every storey is self supporting
and undue weight is not imposed on fixings at the base of the pipe.
Isolate from structure where passing through walls or floors and sleeve pipes as
specified in Section P31.
Provide for thermal and building movement when fixing and jointing, and ensure
that clearances are not reduced as fixing proceeds.
Fix expansion joint pipe sockets rigidly to the building and elsewhere use fixings
that allow the pipe to slide.
465
-
JOINTING PIPEWORK/GUTTERS:
Joint using materials, fittings and techniques which will make effective and
durable connections.
Joint differing pipework/gutter systems with adaptors recommended by
manufacturer(s).
Cut ends of pipes to be clean and square with burrs and swarf removed. Chamfer
pipe ends before inserting into ring seal sockets.
Ensure that jointing or mating surfaces are clean, and where necessary
lubricated, immediately before assembly.
Form junctions using fittings intended for the purpose ensuring that jointing
material does not project into bore of pipes, fittings and appliances.
Remove surplus flux/solvent/cement/sealant from joints.
2
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
R10
ODAC
490
PIPEWORK WITH UNSEALED JOINTS: Ensure that pipes are firmly secured to
prevent rattling at joints and fixings.
515
-
INTUMESCENT COLLARS:
Pipeline nominal size(s): 110 mm
Fire rating: 1 hour
Fixing: As required by manufacturer. Do not use fixings incorporating plastics
materials.
Fit tightly and accurately to structure and pipe to ensure maintenance of the
specified fire resistance. Fill gaps between collar and structure and/or pipe with
intumescent material recommended by the collar manufacturer.
525
-
INSULATION TO INTERNAL PIPELINES/GUTTERS:

Material: Mineral wool insulation
Manufacturer and reference: Contractors choice
Thickness(es): 60 mm
Fire performance: Class 1 spread of flame when tested to BS 476:Part 7.
Fit insulation as required by manufacturer.
Fix securely and neatly, ensuring continuity at supports and leaving no gaps. Fix
split pipe insulation with the split on blind side of pipeline.
Do not fit insulation until completion of testing.
530
IDENTIFICATION OF INTERNAL RAINWATER PIPEWORK: To BS 1710 using

self-adhesive bands or identification clips located at junctions, at both sides of
each slab, bulkhead and wall penetration, and elsewhere as directed.
540
-
ACCESS FOR TESTING AND MAINTENANCE:

Install pipework and gutters with adequate clearance to permit testing, cleaning
and maintenance.
Position access fittings and rodding eyes so that they are not obstructed by other
pipework, framing, etc.
550
561
-
570
TESTING GENERALLY:
Inform CA sufficiently in advance to give him a reasonable opportunity to observe
tests.
Check that all sections of installation are free from obstruction and debris before
testing.
Provide clean water, assistance and apparatus for testing as required.
Carry out tests as specified. After testing, locate and remedy all defects without
delay and retest as instructed.
Keep a record of all tests and provide a copy of each to the CA.
INTERNAL PIPEWORK TEST:
Temporarily seal open ends of pipework with plugs.
Connect a U tube water gauge and air pump via a plug.
Pump air into pipework until gauge registers 50 mm.
Allow a period for temperature stabilization, after which the pressure of 50 mm is
to be maintained without loss for not less than 5 minutes.
GUTTER TEST: Block all outlets, fill gutters to overflow level and after 5 minutes
closely inspect for leakage.
3
AL FATEH UNIVERSITY
R10
590
-
ODAC
IMMEDIATELY BEFORE HANDOVER:

Remove construction rubbish and debris from all roofs and gutters. Where
possible, sweep and remove fine dust which may enter rainwater systems. Do not
sweep or flush dust or debris into the rainwater system.
Remove swarf, debris and temporary caps from the entire rainwater installation.
Ensure that all access covers, rodding eyes, outlet gratings, etc. are secured
complete with all fixings.
4

Division 02 Sitework Final

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Division 02 Sitework Final

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

AL FATEH UNIVERSITY

Wood and Plastics

Thermal and Moisture Protection

Doors and Windows

Doors and Frames

Wooden and Plastic Doors

Entrances and Storefronts

Wooden and Plastic Windows

Further, each Section incorporates seven Parts as follows:

Annex: Tables and Figures: Those relevant to the individual Section.

Paving and Surfacing

Sewerage and Drainage

Division 03: Concrete

Preparation of subgrade and subbase/base course for structures.

Preparation of subgrade and subbase/base course for pavements.

Preparing of subgrade and subbase/base course for utilities.

Excavation and backfilling for structures.

Excavation and backfilling for pavements.

American Society for Testing and Material (ASTM)

Standard Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by Use of

Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate.

Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse

Standard Test Method for Particle-Size Analysis of Soils

Standard Terminology Relating to Soil, Rock, and Contained

Specific gravity of soils.

Determination of the dry density of the soil on the site.

Standard Test Method for Density of Soil in Place by the Sand-

Standard Test Method for Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and

Standard Test Method for Classification of Soils for Engineering

Standard Practice for Description and Identification of Soils

Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in

Place by Nuclear Methods

Standard Test Method for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and

Plasticity Index of Soils

Standard Test Methods for Minimum Index Density of Soils and

Calculation of Relative Density

Code of practice for earthworks

Code of practice for excavation and filling

Organic clay - a clay with a high organic content.

Quality Control Submittals

05.0 Records and reports of External (third-party) Q.C.

Internal Quality Control

External Quality Control

Source Quality Control

1 07 Delivery, Storage, and Handling

Packing and Shipping

Storage and Protection

1 08 Project and Site Conditions

Easily Loosened Excavation

Moderately Loosened Excavation

Excavation Loosened with Difficulties

Rock Excavation for Pits and Trenches

Rock Excavation for Open Excavation

Unclassified Excavation Except for Rock.

Excavated Material to be Filled and Backfilled

Satisfactory Material (Selected Material)

Earthfill under Landscaped Areas

Imported Backfill and Fill

Earthfill under Landscaped Areas

Granular Subbase Course Material

Granular Base Course Material

06.0 Material shall conform to the following gradation:

Granular Drainage Fill under Slabs-on-Grade

3 03 Excavation, Filling, Backfilling and Compaction